Mitsubishi Electric FR-A700 EC Скачать руководство пользователя страница 50 | Manualshive

Страница: 50 / 826

background image

Main circuit connection

Wiring

3 - 12

Cables and wiring length

Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop
will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
400V class

Applicable Inverter
Type

Terminal

Screw

Size

Tight-

ening

Torque

[Nm]

Crimping

Terminal

Cable Size

HIV, etc. [mm²]

AWG

PVC, etc. [mm²]

R/L1,
S/L2,

T/L3,

P1, P

U, V, W

R/L1,
S/L2,

T/L3

U, V, W P, P1

Earth
cable

gauge

R/L1,
S/L2,

T/L3,

P1, P

U, V, W

R/L1,
S/L2,

T/L3,

P1, P

U, V, W

Earth
cable

gauge

FR-A740-00023 to
00126-EC

M4

1.5

2-4

2-4

2

2

2

2

14

14

2.5

2.5

2.5

FR-A740-00170-EC

M4

1.5

2-4

2-4

2

2

3.5

3.5

12

14

2.5

2.5

4

FR-A740-00250-EC

M4

1.5

5.5-4

5.5-4

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

12

12

4

4

4

FR-A740-00310-EC

M5

2.5

5.5-5

5.5-5

3.5

3.5

3.5

8

10

10

6

6

10

FR-A740-00380-EC

M5

2.5

8-5

8-5

8

8

8

8

8

8

10

10

10

FR-A740-00470-EC

M6

4.4

14-6

8-6

14

8

14

14

6

8

16

10

16

FR-A740-00620-EC

M6

4.4

14-6

14-6

14

14

22

14

6

6

16

16

16

FR-A740-00770-EC

M6

4.4

22-6

22-6

22

22

22

14

4

4

25

25

16

FR-A740-00930-EC

M8

7.8

22-8

22-8

22

22

22

14

4

4

25

25

16

FR-A740-01160-EC

M8

7.8

38-8

38-8

38

38

38

22

1

2

50

50

25

FR-A740-01800-EC

M8

7.8

60-8

60-8

60

60

60

22

1/0

1/0

50

50

25

FR-A740-02160-EC

M10

14.7

60-10

60-10

60

60

60

38

1/0

1/0

50

50

25

FR-A740-02600-EC

M10

14.7

60-10

60-10

60

60

80

38

3/0

3/0

50

50

25

FR-A740-03250-EC M10/M12

14.7

80-10

80-10

80

80

80

38

3/0

3/0

70

70

35

FR-A740-03610-EC M10/M12

14.7

100-10 100-10

100

100

100

38

4/0

4/0

95

95

50

FR-A740-04320-EC M12/M10

24.5

150-12 150-12

125

150

150

38

250

250

120

120

70

FR-A740-04810-EC M12/M10

24.5

150-12 150-12

150

150

150

38

300

300

150

150

95

FR-A740-05470-EC M12/M10

24.5

100-12 100-12 2

×

100 2

×

100 2

×

100

60

2

×

4/0 2

×

4/0

2

×

95

2

×

95

95

FR-A740-06100-EC M12/M10

24.5

100-12 100-12 2

×

100 2

×

100 2

×

125

60

2

×

4/0 2

×

4/0

2

×

95

2

×

95

95

FR-A740-06830-EC M12/M10

24.5

150-12 150-12 2

×

125 2

×

125 2

×

125

60

2

×

250 2

×

250 2

×

120 2

×

120

120

FR-A740-07700-EC M12/M10

24.5

150-12 150-12 2

×

150 2

×

150 2

×

150

100

2

×

300 2

×

300 2

×

150 2

×

150

150

FR-A740-08660-EC M12/M10

24.5

C2-200 C2-200 2

×

200 2

×

200 2

×

200

100

2

×

350 2

×

350 2

×

185 2

×

185 2

×

95

FR-A740-09620-EC M12/M10

24.5

C2-200 C2-200 2

×

200 2

×

200 2

×

200

100

2

×

400 2

×

400 2

×

185 2

×

185 2

×

95

FR-A740-10940-EC M12/M10

24.5

C2-250 C2-250 3

×

250 3

×

250 3

×

250

100

3

×

500 3

×

500 2

×

240 2

×

240 2

×

120

FR-A740-12120-EC M12/M10

24.5

C2-200 C2-250 3

×

200 2

×

250 3

×

200 2

×

200 3

×

500 3

×

500 2

×

240 2

×

240 2

×

120

Tab. 3-4:

Cable size

«
...
48
49
50
51
52
...
»

Содержание FR-A700 EC

Страница 1: ...MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION FR A700 Frequency Inverter Instruction Manual FR A740 EC Art No 207935 17 11 2009 Version B ...

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ...uction Manual Inverter FR A700 EC Art no 207935 Version Changes Additions Corrections A 11 2008 pdp gb First Edition B B1 11 2009 09 2010 pdp gb General Page 3 47 Various Corrections Thermal Relay Type Name ...

Страница 4: ......

Страница 5: ...quipment correctly Do not use the inverter un til you have a full knowledge of the equipment safety information and instructions In this in struction manual the safety instruction levels are classified into WARNING and CAUTION Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions Please follow strictly the instructions of both levels because they are important ...

Страница 6: ...e you may get an electric shock or be injured Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock Otherwise you may get an electric shock Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not subject the cables to scratches excessive stress heavy loads or pinching Otherwise you may get an e...

Страница 7: ...ding to the information in the instruction manual Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts missing This can result in breakdowns When carrying the inverter do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial it may fall off or fail Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct Prevent other conductive bodies such as s...

Страница 8: ...stem via these connections if there is an error in the communications system or the data line In configurations like this it is thus essential to install additional safety hardware that makes it possible to stop the system in an emergency e g controller inhibit via control signal external motor contactor etc Clear and unambiguous warnings about this must be posted on site for the operating and ser...

Страница 9: ... motor and machine The DC braking function of the frequency inverter is not designed to continuously hold a load Use an electro mechanical holding brake on the motor for this purpose Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period always perform inspection and test operation For prevention of damage due to static electricity touch nearby metal before touching this product to eli...

Страница 10: ...truction manuals show the inverter without a cover or partially open Never run the inverter in this status Always replace the cover and follow this in struction manual when operating the inverter b CAUTION Do not carry out a megger insulation resistance test on the control circuit of the inverter b CAUTION Treat as industrial waste ...

Страница 11: ...environment 2 6 2 4 2 Inverter placement 2 10 2 4 3 Heatsink protrusion attachment FR A7CN 2 12 3 Wiring 3 1 Inverter and peripheral devices 3 1 3 1 1 Peripheral devices 3 3 3 2 Terminal connection diagram 3 5 3 3 Main circuit connection 3 7 3 3 1 Specification of main circuit terminal 3 7 3 3 2 Terminal layout and wiring 3 8 3 3 3 Separate power supply for the control circuit 3 16 3 4 Control cir...

Страница 12: ... 3 55 3 8 8 Installation of a reactor 3 55 3 9 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC 3 56 3 9 1 Leakage currents and countermeasures 3 56 3 9 2 Inverter generated noises and their reduction techniques 3 61 3 9 3 EMC filter 3 64 3 9 4 Power supply harmonics 3 65 3 9 5 Inverter driven 400V class motor 3 66 4 Operation 4 1 Precautions for use of the inverter 4 1 4 2 Drive the motor 4 3 4 3 Operation pane...

Страница 13: ...ation unaffected by the motor temperature online auto tuning 5 30 5 1 11 To perform high accuracy fast response operation gain adjustment of real sensorless vector control Pr 818 to Pr 821 Pr 880 5 32 5 2 PU operation mode 5 40 5 2 1 Set the set frequency to operate 5 41 5 2 2 Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation 5 42 5 2 3 Use switches to give the frequency command multi...

Страница 14: ...Setting procedure of real sensorless vector control torque control 6 110 6 4 2 Setting procedure of vector control torque control 6 112 6 4 3 Torque control 6 113 6 4 4 Torque command Pr 803 to Pr 806 6 113 6 4 5 Speed limit Pr 807 to Pr 809 6 117 6 4 6 Activation of torque control during start and stop processes 6 121 6 4 7 Gain adjustment of torque control Pr 824 Pr 825 Pr 834 Pr 835 6 124 6 5 P...

Страница 15: ...on deceleration Pr 61 Pr 64 Pr 292 6 178 6 9 4 Adjustable 5 points V f Pr 71 Pr 100 bis Pr 109 6 181 6 10 Frequency setting by external terminals 6 183 6 10 1 Multi speed setting operation 6 183 6 10 2 Jog operation Pr 15 Pr 16 6 186 6 10 3 Input compensation of multi speed and remote setting Pr 28 6 190 6 10 4 Remote setting function Pr 59 6 191 6 11 Acceleration and deceleration 6 195 6 11 1 Acc...

Страница 16: ... 155 6 292 6 14 4 Start signal selection Terminal STF STR STOP Pr 250 6 294 6 14 5 Output terminal function selection Pr 190 to Pr 196 6 298 6 14 6 Detection of output frequency SU FU FU2 FU3 LS Pr 41 to Pr 43 Pr 50 Pr 116 Pr 865 6 309 6 14 7 Output current detection function Y12 Y13 Pr 150 to Pr 153 Pr 166 Pr 167 6 312 6 14 8 Detection of output torque TU signal Pr 864 6 314 6 14 9 Remote output ...

Страница 17: ... compensation Pr 73 Pr 242 Pr 243 Pr 252 Pr 253 6 377 6 20 4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination Pr 74 Pr 822 Pr 826 Pr 832 Pr 836 Pr 849 6 380 6 20 5 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage current Pr 125 Pr 126 Pr 241 C2 Pr 902 to C7 Pr 905 C12 Pr 917 bis C15 Pr 918 6 382 6 20 6 Bias and gain of torque magnetic flux setting voltage current Pr 241 C16 Pr 919 to C19 Pr 920 C38 ...

Страница 18: ... Load torque high speed frequency control Pr 4 Pr 5 Pr 270 bis Pr 274 6 509 6 24 4 Droop control Pr 286 to Pr 288 6 512 6 24 5 Frequency setting by pulse train input Pr 291 Pr 384 to Pr 386 6 514 6 24 6 Encoder feedback control Pr 144 Pr 285 Pr 359 Pr 367 to Pr 369 6 517 6 24 7 Traverse function Pr 592 to Pr 597 6 520 6 24 8 Regeneration avoidance function Pr 882 to Pr 886 6 523 6 25 Useful functi...

Страница 19: ...ting 7 28 7 6 6 Acceleration deceleration is not smooth 7 29 7 6 7 Motor current is large 7 29 7 6 8 Speed does not increase 7 29 7 6 9 Speed varies during operation 7 29 7 6 10 Operation mode is not changed properly 7 30 7 6 11 Operation panel FR DU07 display is not operating 7 30 7 6 12 POWER lamp is not lit 7 30 7 6 13 Parameter write cannot be performed 7 30 7 7 Meters and measuring methods 7 ...

Страница 20: ...o 01160 A 1 A 2 Specifications FR A 740 01800 to 12120 A 3 A 3 Common specifications A 5 A 4 Outline dimension drawings A 7 A 4 1 FR A 740 00023 to 00126 A 7 A 4 2 FR A 740 00170 to 00380 A 8 A 4 3 FR A 740 00470 and 00620 A 9 A 4 4 FR A 740 00770 to 01160 A 10 A 4 5 FR A 740 01800 A 11 A 4 6 FR A 740 02160 and 02600 A 12 A 4 7 FR A 740 03250 and 3610 A 13 A 4 8 FR A 740 04320 and 04810 A 14 A 4 9...

Страница 21: ...r and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact 1 1 Inverter Type I001410E Fig 1 1 Inverter type FR A740 EC Symbol Voltage Class A740 Three phase 400V class Symbol Type number 00023 to 12120 5 digit display ...

Страница 22: ...o section 3 4 Main circuit terminal block refer to section 3 3 CHARGE lamp Lit when power is supplied to the main circuit POWER lamp Lit when the control circuit R1 L11 S1 L21 is supplied with power ALARM lamp Lit when the inverter is in the alarm status major fault refer to chapter 7 Connector with without EMC filter refer to section 3 9 3 AU PTC switchover refer to section 3 4 Connector for plug...

Страница 23: ... M8 for hanging the inverter are delivered with the models 00770 to 06830 Jumper A jumper is delivered with the model 01800 refer to section 3 3 1 Capacity Screw Size mm Number 00083 00126 M3 35 1 00170 to 00380 M4 40 2 00470 00620 M4 50 1 Tab 1 1 Fan cover fixing screws NOTES The fan cover fixing screws are not delivered with models 00620 or less For removal and reinstallation of the cooling fans...

Страница 24: ...Description of the Case Product Checking and Part Identification 1 4 ...

Страница 25: ...tion panel These screws cannot be removed Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove When reinstalling the operation panel insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the operation panel I000991E Fig 2 1 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel Loosen the screws Remove operation panel ...

Страница 26: ...ft side of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter Using the fixed hooks as supports securely press the front cover against the inverter Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted make sure that a connector is securely fixed Tighten the installation screws and fix the front cover I000992E Fig 2 2 Removal of the front cover I000993E Fig 2 3 Reinstallation of the fro...

Страница 27: ... the front cover 1 Loosen the installation screws of the front cover 2 Pull the front cover 2 toward you to remove by pushing an installation hook on the right side using left fixed hooks as supports I000994E Fig 2 4 Removal of the front cover Loosen the screw of front cover 1 Remove front cover Installation hook Front cover 1 Front cover 2 Loosen the screw of front cover 2 ...

Страница 28: ...Reinstallation of the front cover NOTES For the FR A740 04320 or more the front cover 1 is separated into two parts Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely Always tighten the instal lation screws of the front cover The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter Before reinstalling the front cover check the ...

Страница 29: ...23 to 00620 CAUTION When encasing multiple inverters follow the instructions on page 2 10 00770 to 12120 Refer to Fig 2 8 Fix six positions for the FR A740 04320 to 08660 and fix eight positions for the FR A740 09620 to 12120 Direct sunlight Vibration 5 9m s 2 9m s or more for the 04320 or more High temperature high humidity Horizontal placement Vertical mounting When installing two or more invert...

Страница 30: ...of the semiconductors parts capacitors and others Take the following measures so that the ambient temperature of the inverter falls within the specified range Measures against high temperature Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system Refer to page 2 9 Install the enclosure in an air conditioned electrical chamber Block direct sunlight Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid dir...

Страница 31: ... temperature changes suddenly Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion Take the measures against high humidity Do not power off the inverter Keep the start signal of the inverter off Dust dirt oil mist Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contact of contact points reduced insulation or re duced cooling effect due to moisture absorption of accumulated dust and dir...

Страница 32: ...m If it is used at a higher place it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pres sure will deteriorate dielectric strength Vibration impact The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5 9m s 2 9m s for the 04320 or more at 10 to 55Hz frequency and 1mm amplitude as specified in JIS C 60068 2 6 Vibration or impact if less than the specified value applied for a long ...

Страница 33: ...hanger or cooler Heat pipe cooler etc Cooling System Enclosure Structure Comment Natural cooling Natural ventilation Enclosed open type I001000E Low in cost and generally used but the enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity increases For relatively small capacities Natural ventilation Totally enclosed type I001001E Being a totally enclosed type the most appropriate for hostile environmen...

Страница 34: ...built in the unit Any equipment placed above the inverter should be heat resistant I001005E Fig 2 8 Clearances NOTE For replacing the cooling fan of the 04320 or more 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter Refer to section 8 1 7 for fan replacement Ambient temperature and humidity Clearances side Clearances front Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures Inverter Measurement p...

Страница 35: ...oling fan When installing a ventilation fan for that heat determine the place of ventilation fan instal lation after fully considering an air flow Air passes through areas of low resistance Make an air way and airflow plates to expose the inverter to cool air I001006E Fig 2 9 Arrangement of multiple inverters NOTE When mounting multiple inverters fully take caution not to make the ambient temperat...

Страница 36: ... more refer to Fig A 17 in the appendix Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame FR A740 04320 to 06830 One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lowerpart of the inverter Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the frontside as shown below When changing the installation frames make sure that the installati...

Страница 37: ...nment of waterdrops oil mist dust etc Be careful not to drop screws dust etc into the inverter and cooling fan section Enclosure Installation frame Cooling wind Exhausted air Inverter Inside the enclosure Dimension of the outside of the enclosure Finger guard Enclosure For the FR A740 04320 or more there are finger guards behind the enclosure Therefore the thickness of the panel should be less tha...

Страница 38: ...Enclosure design Installation 2 14 ...

Страница 39: ...the 01800 or less Compatible with the 02160 or more Magnetic contactor MC Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety Do not use this magnetic contactor to start and stop the inverter Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shorten Refer to section 3 1 1 USB connector A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB Ver1 1 cable Inverter FR A 700 EC The life of the inverter ...

Страница 40: ...erence in the input and output that can be propagated by cable via the power input lines by wireless radiation to nearby equipment e g AM radios or via data and signal lines Activate the integrated EMC filter and an additional optional filter if present to reduce air propagated interference on the input side of the inverter Use AC or DC reactors to reduce line propagated noise harmonics Use shield...

Страница 41: ... NF63 xx 3P 63 A NF125 xx 3P 100 A S N35 S N25 22 FR A740 00620 EC NF125 xx 3P 100 A NF125 xx 3P 100 A NF125 xx 3P 100 A S N50 S N35 30 FR A740 00770 EC NF125 xx 3P 125 A NF125 xx 3P 100 A NF125 xx 3P 125 A S N65 S N50 37 FR A740 00930 EC NF160 xx 3P 163 A NF125 xx 3P 125 A NF160 xx 3P 163 A S N80 S N65 45 FR A740 01160 EC NF250 xx 3P 250 A NF160 xx 3P 163 A NF250 xx 3P 250 A S N80 S N80 55 FR A74...

Страница 42: ... magnetic contactor is 500 000 times When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving the electrical durability is 25 times When using the MC for emergancy stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial power supply operation select the MC with class AC 3 rated current for the motor rated current When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips...

Страница 43: ...ut Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5V DC 0 10V DC 4 20mA DC 0 to 10V DC 4 to 20mA DC 0 to 5V DC 0 to 5V DC 0 to 10V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Option connector 3 Terminating resistor 5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover Pr 73 Pr 267 Set the voltage current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input 0 to...

Страница 44: ...offcuts must not be left in the inverter Wire offcuts can cause an alarm failure or malfunction Always keep the inverter clean When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc take care not to allow chips and other for eign matter to enter the inverter Set the voltage current input switch in right position Different setting may cause a fault fail ure or malfunction ...

Страница 45: ...terminals L1 L11 and L2 L21 and apply external power to these terminals Do not turn off the power supply for control circuit L11 L21 with the main circuit power L1 L2 L3 on Doing so may damage the inverter The circuit should be configured so that the main circuit power L1 L2 L3 is also turned off when the power supply for control circuit L11 L21 is off 00380 or less 60VA 00470 or more 80VA P PR Br...

Страница 46: ...E Tab 3 3 Terminal layout and wiring 1 Jumper Jumper Screw size M4 L1 L2 L3 M 3 Screw size M4 CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper Jumper Screw size M4 L1 L2 L3 CHARGE lamp M 3 Motor Screw size M4 Power supply Jumper Jumper Screw size M4 L1 M 3 Screw size M5 CHARGE lamp Motor L2 L3 Power supply Screw size M5 Jumper Jumper Screw size M4 M 3 Screw size M6 CHARGE lamp Motor L1 L2 L3 Power supply Scr...

Страница 47: ...8 L1 M 3 Screw size M4 CHARGE lamp Motor L2 L3 Power supply Screw size 00770 M6 00930 01160 M8 Jumper L1 M 3 Screw size M4 CHARGE lamp Motor L2 L3 Power supply Screw size M10 Screw size M8 DC reactor Screw size M8 Screw size M8 Jumper Screw size M4 L1 M 3 Screw size M10 CHARGE LED Motor L2 L3 Power supply DC reactor Screw size M10 Jumper Screw size M4 L1 M 3 Screw size M10 CHARGE lamp Motor L2 L3 ...

Страница 48: ...g so will damage the inverter Phase sequence needs not to be matched Connect the motor to U V W At this time turning on the forward rotation switch signal rotates the motor in the counter clockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft Jumper Screw size M4 L1 M 3 Screw size M12 CHARGE lamp Motor L2 L3 Power supply Screw size M12 for option DC reactor Screw size M10 Jumper Screw size M4 L1 M 3...

Страница 49: ...s nuts provided with the inverter Wiring cover The frequency inverters FR A740 00470 and 00620 are equipped with a combed shaped wiring cover For the hook of the wiring cover cut off the necessary parts using a pair of long nose pliers etc Fig 3 4 Connection to the conductors I001346E I000999E Fig 3 5 Combed shaped wiring cover NOTE Cut off the same numbers of lugs as wires If you cut off unnecess...

Страница 50: ... M8 7 8 22 8 22 8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 FR A740 01160 EC M8 7 8 38 8 38 8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25 FR A740 01800 EC M8 7 8 60 8 60 8 60 60 60 22 1 0 1 0 50 50 25 FR A740 02160 EC M10 14 7 60 10 60 10 60 60 60 38 1 0 1 0 50 50 25 FR A740 02600 EC M10 14 7 60 10 60 10 60 60 80 38 3 0 3 0 50 50 25 FR A740 03250 EC M10 M12 14 7 80 10 80 10 80 80 80 38 3 0 3 0 70 70 35 FR A740 03610 EC M10 M12 14 7 ...

Страница 51: ... of the PVC cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70 C Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40 C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less For the 01800 or more the recommended cable size is that of XLPE cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90 C Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40 C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure The terminal s...

Страница 52: ...where the inverter is connected with the other equip ment at an earthing point Joint earthing as in III must be avoided as the inverter is connected with the other equipment by a common earth cable Also a leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the earth cables of the inverter and inverter driven motor Therefore they must use the independ ent earthing method and be separa...

Страница 53: ... parallel you must add the lengths of the individual motor cables Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting carrier frequency 00023 00038 00052 2 2kHz 300m 500m 500m 3 3kHz 4 4kHz 200m 300m 500m 5 5kHz to 9 9kHz 100m 10 10kHz 50m Tab 3 5 Total wiring lenght NOTE For the 02160 or more the setting range of Pr 72 PWM frequency selection is 0 to 6 Fig 3 7 Total wiring lenght 00052 or more I001017E NOTE No...

Страница 54: ...as shown in the circuit diagram below Remove the shortening jumpers from the terminal block and connect the 380 480V AC 50 60Hz mains power supply to terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 The control circuit power consump tion on L11 L21 is 60VA for 00380 or less and 80VA for 00470 to 12120 FR A740 00023 to 00126 EC Loosen the upper screws and then the lower screws Remove the jumpers Connect the separate po...

Страница 55: ...d then the lower screws Remove the jumpers Connect the separate power supply cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 I001025E Fig 3 10 Detailed view of the terminals I001026E Fig 3 11 Detailed view of the terminals b CAUTION Never connect the power cable to the terminals in the lower stand Doing so will damage the inverter Main circuit terminals Power supply terminal...

Страница 56: ... the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the primary side of the MC The power capacity is 60VA or more for 00380 or 80VA or more for 00470 to 12120 when separate power is supplied from R1 L11 S1 L21 When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit make up a circuit which will swi...

Страница 57: ... 2kΩ Contacts at short circuited 8 to 13mADC 6 286 RT Second function Turn on the RT signal to select second function When the second function such as second torque boost and second V F base fre quency are set turning on the RT signal selects these functions Input resist ance 4 7kΩ Voltage at opening 21 to 27V DC Contacts at short circuited 4 to 6mA DC 6 286 MRS Output stop Turn on the MRS signal ...

Страница 58: ...setting poten tiometer at an initial status connect it to termi nal 10 Change the input specifications with Pr 73 when connecting it to terminal 10E Refer to section 6 20 3 Recommended potentiometer 1 kΩ 2 W lin ear multi turn potentiometer 10V DC 0 4V Permissible load current 10mA 6 369 10 Output volt age 5V DC 5 2V DC 0 2V Permissible load current 10mA 6 369 2 Frequency setting voltage Inputting...

Страница 59: ...o 10V DC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency setting signal Use Pr 73 to switch between the input 0 to 5V DC and 0 to 10V DC initial setting Input resist ance 10kΩ 1kΩ Maximum permissible voltage 20V DC 6 369 5 Frequency setting common and analog outputs Terminal 5 provides the common reference potential 0V for all analog set point values and for the analog output signals CA current and ...

Страница 60: ...urrent value out put frequency of the inverter approaches the frequency setting value determined by the setting value signal within a preset range of tolerance Pr 41 Switched high during accel eration deceleration and at a stop Alarm code 4 bit Refer to section 6 17 2 6 298 OL Overload alarm The OL is switched low if the output current of the inverter exceeds the cur rent limit preset in Pr 22 and...

Страница 61: ...ion Refer to RS 485 PU connector With the PU connector communication can be made through RS 485 for connection on a 1 1 basis only Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Transmission format Multidrop Communication speed 4800 to 38400bps Overall lenght 500m 6 437 RS 485 terminal TXD Inverter transmission terminal With the RS 485 terminal communication can be made through RS 485 Conforming standard EIA ...

Страница 62: ...ory To change the control logic the jumper connector on the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position I001028E Fig 3 13 Changing the control logic NOTE Turn off the inverter power before switching a jumper connector ...

Страница 63: ...signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals I001029E Fig 3 14 Changing the control logic RUN RUN Current flow concerning the input output signals when sink logic is selected Current flow concerning the input output signals when source logic is selec...

Страница 64: ...upply do not install a power supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter Doing so may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current Source logic type When using an external power supply for transistor output use terminal SD as a common to prevent misoperation caused by undesirable current Fig 3 15 Using an external power supply in connection with the outputs of a PLC I001030E Fig 3 16 Using...

Страница 65: ...nd insert the cable into the terminal I001018E Fig 3 17 Übersicht der Klemmenbelegung Fig 3 18 Preparation of the cable I001326E Item Description Screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 5Nm 0 6Nm Cable size 0 3mm 0 75mm Screwdriver Flat blade screw driver Edge thickness 0 4mm 2 5mm Tab 3 9 Connection to the terminals b CAUTION Under tightening can cause cable disconnection or malfunction Over tightening...

Страница 66: ...a common terminal for frequency setting signal terminal 2 1 or 4 analog current output terminal CA and analog output terminal AM It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal RUN SU OL IPF FU The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler Signal inputs by ...

Страница 67: ...trol circuit Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals A B C via a relay coil lamp etc It is recommended to use the cables of 0 75mm gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals If the cable gauge used is 1 25mm or more the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly resulting in an operation panel contact fault The wiring lengt...

Страница 68: ...ted on the enclosure surface and operationally improves Fig 3 22 Connecting the operation panel using a connection cable I001032E NOTES Overall wiring lenght when the operation panel is connected 20m Using the PU connector the frequency inverter can be connected to a RS 485 interface of a personal computer etc refer to section 6 23 Connection cable FR A5 CBL Operation panel connection connector FR...

Страница 69: ...Multidrop link Communication speed Max 38400bps Overall lenght 500m Connection cable Twisted pair cable 4 pairs Tab 3 10 Specifications of the RS 485 terminal block I001033E Fig 3 23 RS 485 terminal block Terminating resistor switch Factory set to OPEN Set only the terminating resistor switch of the first and the remotest inverter to the 100Ω position ...

Страница 70: ...le a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol computer link operation communication can be performed with the PU connector and RS 485 terminal For the Mod bus RTU protocol communication can be performed with the RS 485 terminal Refer to section 6 23 I001034E Fig 3 24 RS 485 terminal block of the frequency inverter 32 inverte...

Страница 71: ...toring with the FR Configurator Specification Description Interface USB 1 1 Transmission speed 12Mbps Maximum cable lenght 5m Connector USB B connector B receptable Power supply Self power supply Tab 3 11 USB connector specification I001460E Abb 3 25 Connection to the USB interface Removal of cover Place a flat blade screwdriver etc in a slot and push up the cover to open USB cable USB connector ...

Страница 72: ...signal input terminal PZ2 Encoder Z phase inversion signal input terminal PG Encoder power supply positive side input terminal Input terminal for the encoder power supply Connect the external power sup ply 5V 12V 15V 24V and the encoder power cable SD Encoder power supply ground terminal PIN Not used PO Tab 3 12 Terminals of the FR A7AP Terminal block Front view Mounting hole Mounting hole Rear vi...

Страница 73: ... driver and set to OFF when complimentary ON with internal terminating resistor initial status OFF without internal terminating resistor Fig 3 27 Encoder specification selection switch I001439E Fig 3 28 Terminating resistor selection switch I001440E NOTES Set all switches to the same setting ON OFF If the encoder output type is differential line driver set the terminating resistor switch to the OF...

Страница 74: ... SF JRCA Differential ON 5V SF HRCA Differential ON 5V Others Vector control dedi cated motor SF V5RU Differential OFF 12V Other manufacturer motor Tab 3 13 Motor used and switch setting b CAUTION SW3 switch is for manufacturer setting Do not change the setting Item Description Resolution 1024 Pulse Rev Power supply voltage 5V DC 10 Current consumption 150mA Output signal form A B phases 90 phase ...

Страница 75: ...ith the conductive area Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose In addition do not sol der it Use a bar terminal as necessary Connection to the option FR A7AP I001441E Fig 3 29 SF JR Motor with Encoder Fig 3 30 Cable stripping size I001326E Motor SF JR HR JRCA HRCA with Encoder Encoder Cable FR JCBL FR A7AP terminal PA1 PA PA2 PAR PB1 PB PB2 PBR PZ1 PZ PZ2 PZR P...

Страница 76: ... encoder power specification When performing orientation control together an encoder and power supply can be shared For terminal compatibility of the FR JCBL and FR A7AP refer to page 3 37 Standard motor with encoder SF JR 5V differential line driver Vector control dedicated motor 12V complimentary I001443E I001444E Tab 3 16 Speed control NOTE The figure above shows the connection when using sink ...

Страница 77: ...he encoder power specification When performing orientation control together an encoder and power supply can be shared For terminal compatibility of the FR JCBL and FR A7AP refer to page 3 37 Standard motor with encoder SF JR 5V differential line driver Vector control dedicated motor 12V complimentary I001445E I001446E Tab 3 17 Torque control NOTE The figure above shows the connection when using si...

Страница 78: ... and power supply can be shared For terminal compatibility of the FR JCBL and FR A7AP refer to page 3 37 Assign the function using Pr 178 to Pr 184 Pr 187 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection When position control is selected terminal JOG function is made invalid and conditional position pulse train input terminal becomes valid Assign the function using Pr 190 to Pr 194 Output terminal func...

Страница 79: ...asing the power by 5V approx 5 5V using six or more cables with gauge size of 0 2mm in parallel or a cable with gauge size of 1 25mm or more Note that the voltage applied should be within power supply specifications of encoder To reduce noise of the encoder cable earth ground the encoder shielded cable to the enclos ure as near as the inverter with a P clip or U clip made of metal Wiring Length Pa...

Страница 80: ...rrent 20 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024 SF HR Motor rated current 40 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024 Others Motor rated current 3 Motor capacity Number of motor poles Mitsubishi con stant torque motor SF JRCA 4P Motor rated current 1 Motor capacity 4 1 1024 SF HRCA 4P Motor rated current 15 Motor capacity 4 1 1024 Others Motor rated current 13 Motor capacity Number of moto...

Страница 81: ...ways running and consumes a little power When stopping the inverter for an extended period of time powering off the inverter will save power slightly To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work The inverter s input side MC is used for the above purpose select class JEM1038 AC3MC for the inverter input side current when making an emergency stop duri...

Страница 82: ...actor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating over current protection of the inverter and such will activate When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply for example it is recommended to use commercial power supply inverter switch over operation Pr 135 to Pr 139 Exam...

Страница 83: ...ilt in brake resistor is not need to be removed from the inverter The lead wire of the built in brake resistor is not need to be removed from the terminal Set parameters below Pr 30 Regenerative function selection 1 Pr 70 Special regenerative brake duty 00250 or less 10 00310 or more 6 Refer to section 6 13 2 FR A740 00023 to 00126 Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper Con...

Страница 84: ...PR Do not remove a jumper across terminal P and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor Removal of jumper Connection of Brake Resistor I001453E I001454E Tab 3 22 Connection of the external brake resistor 00170 to 00250 FR A740 00310 and 00380 FR A740 00470 and 00620 I001455E I001456E Tab 3 23 Connection of the external brake resistor 00310 to 00620 Jumper Terminal PR Terminal PX Terminal P Terminal...

Страница 85: ...stor Thermal Relay Type Contact Rating 400V FR ABR H0 4K TH N20CXHZKP 0 24A 110V 5A AC 220V 2A AC AC 11 class 110V 0 5A DC 220V 0 25A DC DC 11 class FR ABR H0 75K TH N20CXHZKP 0 35A FR ABR H2 2K TH N20CXHZKP 0 9A FR ABR H3 7K TH N20CXHZKP 1 3A FR ABR H5 5K TH N20CXHZKP 2 1A FR ABR H7 5K TH N20CXHZKP 2 5A FR ABR H11K on request FR ABR H15K on request FR ABR H22K on request Tab 3 24 Combination of r...

Страница 86: ... you must install a transformer when using a 400V power supply Be sure to remove a jumper across terminal PR PX when using the FR BU with the inverter of 00250 or less The wiring distance between the inverter brake unit and resistor unit should be within 5m If twisted wires are used the distance should be within 10m I001640E Fig 3 35 Connection with the brake unit FR BU b CAUTION If the transistor...

Страница 87: ...3 36 Connection with the brake unit MT BU5 b CAUTION Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied with the brake unit reaches the inverter For wiring of the brake unit and inverter use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit Connect the main circuit cable to the inverter terminals P and N and connect the c...

Страница 88: ...hrough a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely I001348E Fig 3 37 Rubber bush I001349E Fig 3 38 Connection of the CN8 connector b CAUTION Do not connect the MT BU5 to a CN8 connector of the FR A740 01800 Rubber bushes Make cuts in rubber bush Insert the connector until you hear a click sound CN8 conne...

Страница 89: ...N N Opposite polarity of terminals N P will damage the inverter Use Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the terminals used for the X10 X11 signal Refer to section 6 14 1 For communication where the start command is sent only once e g RS 485 communication operation use the X11 signal when making setting to hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure Refer ...

Страница 90: ...ed for the X10 X11 signal Refer to section 6 14 1 For communication where the start command is sent only once e g RS 485 communication operation use the X11 signal when making setting to hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure Refer to section 6 13 2 Connect the power supply to terminals R1 and S1 of the MT HC via an insulated transformer I001351E Fig 3 40 Connection with the...

Страница 91: ...ll damage the inverter E OPT option alarm will occur Refer to page 7 16 Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P N P L P N L N Opposite polarity of terminals N P will damage the inverter Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection Refer to section 6 14 1 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R L11 S L21 T MC1 Operating the invert...

Страница 92: ...n selection and 0 in Pr 70 Special regenerative brake duty b CAUTION Perform wiring of the power regeneration converter MT RC securely as shown below Incorrect connection will damage the power regeneration converter and inverter I001352E Fig 3 42 Connection of the power regeneration converter MT RC NOTE Refer to the MT RC manual for precautions for connecting the power coordination reactor and oth...

Страница 93: ... B When connecting the FR HEL to the 01160 or less remove the jumper across terminals P P1 For the 01800 or more a DC reactor is supplied Always install the reactor Fig 3 43 Connection of a DC reactor I001040E NOTES The wiring distance should be within 5m The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables R L1 S L2 T L3 Refer to page 3 12 For inverters 01...

Страница 94: ...and surge suppression in the inverter s own line and other line operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high with low noise To earth leakage currents Take caution as long wiring will increase the leakage current Decreasing the carrier frequency of the inverter reduces the leakage current Increasing the motor capacity increases the leakage current Shielded motor cables significan...

Страница 95: ...apacity of the circuit breaker on the basis of the cross sectional area of the power supply lines To calculate the required mains current trip point you need to know the power required by the inverter Refer to Rated Input Capacity in Appendix A Specifications and the mains supply voltage Select a circuit breaker with a trip point that is slightly higher than calculated particularly in the case of ...

Страница 96: ...nted triggering of the ELCB This problem can be avoided by using a Type B ELCB with a delayed response function or by using a contac tor relay to switch all three phases simultaneously Calculate the trip current sensitivity of the ELB as follows Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression IΔn 10 Ig1 Ign Igi lg2 lgm Standard breaker IΔn 10 Ig1 Ign Igi 3 Ig2 lgm Ig1 Ig2 Leakage currents in w...

Страница 97: ...r Leakage current Igi mA 1 with additional noise filter Refer to the following table for the leakage current of the inverter Leakage current Ig2 mA Motor leakage current Igm mA 0 36 Total leakage current mA 2 79 6 15 Rated sensivity current mA lg 10 30 100 Tab 3 26 Estimation of the permanent flowing leakage current Voltage V Built in EMC Filter ON mA OFF mA Phase grounding 400 30 1 Earth neutral ...

Страница 98: ... regulations and electrical codes JIS NEC section 250 IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is less than the rating In this case do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase leading to tem perature rise The follow...

Страница 99: ...onnection and control signal cables Earth the shield Earth the inverter motor etc at one point Techniques to reduce noises that enter and malfunction the inverter When devices that generate many noises which use magnetic contactors magnetic brakes many relays for example are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunc tioned by noises the following measures must be taken Provide su...

Страница 100: ...d from inverter Noise radiated from power supply cable Noise radiated from mo tor connection cable Electromagnetic induction noise Electrostatic induction noise Electrical path propa gated noise Noise propagated through power supply ca ble Ground wire by leak age current Path Path Path Path Path Path Path Instrument Receiver Inverter Telephone Sensor power supply Sensor M 3 Motor ...

Страница 101: ...s as far away as possible from the I O cables of the inverter 앫 Do not run the signal cables and power cables inverter I O cables in parallel with each other and do not bundle them 앫 Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inver...

Страница 102: ...ting the connector push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed When installing the connector also engage the fixing tab securely If it is difficult to disconnect the connector use a pair of long nose pliers etc I001052E Fig 3 50 Built in EMC filter I001053E Fig 3 51 Activating the built in EMC filter NOTE Fit th...

Страница 103: ...e wiring path Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible Random occurrence quantitative grasping difficult Generated amount Nearly proportional to load capacity Depending on the current fluctuation ratio larger as switching is faster Affected equipment immunity Specified in standard per equipment Different depending on maker s equip ment specifications Suppression example Provide ...

Страница 104: ...onstant torque motor and low vibration motor use the inverter driven dedicated motor Set Pr 72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length Limiting the voltage rise speed of the frequency inverter output voltage dU dT If the motor requires a rise speed of 500V µs or less you must install a filter in the output of the inverter Please contact your Mitsubishi dealer for ...

Страница 105: ...t response current limit function may be reduced or the equipment connected to the inverter output side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring Therefore note the overall wiring length Refer to page 3 15 Electromagnetic Compatibility Operation of the frequency inverter can cause electromagnetic interference in the input and...

Страница 106: ... supply inverter switch over circuit as shown below the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of switch over or chattering caused by a sequence error Commercial operation can not be performed with the vector dedicated motor SF V5RU SF THY Instructions for overload operation When performing operation of frequent start stop of the inverte...

Страница 107: ...e PU connector and RS 485 terminal of the inverter and plug in option Communication Refer to section 3 6 1 Start command with FWD REV on the operation panel PU How to give a frequency command Connect a switch relay etc to the control circuit terminal block of the inverter to give a start command External How to give a frequency command Set from the PU FR DU07 FR PU04 or FR PU07 PU External Externa...

Страница 108: ...y 앫 Current 앫 Voltage Operation mode indication LED to indicate the operation mode 앫 PU operation mode PU 앫 External operation mode EXT 앫 Network operation mode NET SPS operation Lit to indicate SPS operation Monitor indication Lit to indicate monitoring mode Rotation direction indication LED to indicate the operation mode 앫 Forward rotation FWD 앫 Reverse rotation REV 앫 Forward reverse operation O...

Страница 109: ... If pressed during operation monitor changes as below Energy saving monitor is displayed when the energy saving monitor of Pr 52 is set Mode switch over Use to change the setting mode Operation mode switch over Used to switch between the PU and external operation mode When using the external operation mode operation using a separately connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal pres...

Страница 110: ...put frequency monitor Value change Example and frequency flicker Frequency setting has been written and completed Output current monitor Output voltage monitor Parameter setting mode Display the current setting Example Parameter and a setting value flicker alternately Parameter clear Parameter all clear Alarm clear Parameter write is completed Parameter copy The operation for displaying the alam h...

Страница 111: ...tal dial key operation invalid When the digital dial and key operation is made invalid HOLD appears on the operation panel When the digital dial and key operation is invalid HOLD appears if the digital dial or key operation is performed When the digital dial or key operation is not performed for 2s the monitor display appears To make the digital dial and key operation valid again press the MODE ke...

Страница 112: ...s the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until P 161 Pr 161 appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 0 appears Turn the digital dial clockwise to change it to the setting value of 10 Press the SET key to set Press the MODE key for 2s to show the key lock mode Operation Display The parameter number read previously appears Flicker P...

Страница 113: ...T key for 1s after displaying the out put frequency monitor 4 3 6 Digital dial push Push the digital dial to display the set frequency currently set I001066E Fig 4 6 Monitoring of output current and output voltage Fig 4 7 Display the set frequency currently set I001067E Press the MODE key during operation to choose the output frequency monitor Hz indication is lit Independently of whether the inve...

Страница 114: ...until P 1 Pr 1 appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 120 0 appears Turn the digital dial clockwise to change it to the setting value of 50 00 Press the SET key to set Operation Display The parameter number read previously appears Flicker Parameter setting complete PU indication is lit 앫 By turning the digital dial you can read another parameter 앫 Press the SET...

Страница 115: ... again I001113E Fig 4 9 Parameter clear Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until Pr CL parameter clear appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 0 appears Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting value of 1 Pres...

Страница 116: ... I001114E Fig 4 10 All parameter clear Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until ALLC all parameter clear appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 0 appears Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting value of 1 Pr...

Страница 117: ...ers in the inverter and operation panel Tab 4 2 Setting of parameter PCPY NOTES When the copy destination inverter is not the FR A700 series or parameter copy write is per formed after parameter read is stopped model error rE4 is displayed Refer to the extended parameter list Tab 6 1 for availability of parameter copy When the power is turned off or an operation panel is disconnected etc during pa...

Страница 118: ...tion panel Connect the the operation panel to the copy destination inverter Check that Pr 77 of the destination inverter is not set to disable parameter writing Perform steps to again Turn the digital dial clockwise until 2 appears Press the SET key to write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the destination inverter When copy is completed 2 and PCPY flicker After writing the paramete...

Страница 119: ...ed in parameter 77 Set 0 in Pr 160 User group read selection and set Pr 77 Parameter write selection to 0 or 2 CP and 0 00 appear alternately Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 01800 or less and 02160 or more Countermeasure Set 0 in Pr 160 User group read selection Set the following setting initial value in Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release Reset Pr 9 Pr 30 Pr 51 Pr 52 Pr...

Страница 120: ...s Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until PCPY parameter copy appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 0 appears Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting value of 3 parameter copy verification mode Press the SET key to read the parameter setting of the verified inverter to the operation panel 앫If different para...

Страница 121: ...be displayed Tab 5 1 Setting of parameter 160 Pr Name Incre ments Initial Value Range Description Refer to 0 Torque boost 0 1 6 4 3 2 1 0 30 Set to increase a starting torque or when the motor with a load will not rotate resulting in an alarm OL and a trip OC1 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity 00023 00038 00052 to 00126 00170 00250 00310 to 01800 021600 or more 5 6 1 Maximum...

Страница 122: ...ted motor current The increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 5 3 79 Operation mode selection 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 Select the start command location and frequency command location 5 12 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 01Hz 50Hz 0 400Hz Frequency for the maximum value of the potentiometer 5V initial value can be changed 5 57 1...

Страница 123: ... current 02160 or more 0 3600A Example 쑴 Change the Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay setting to 2 5A FR A740 00023 EC according to the motor rated current I001068E Fig 4 1 Setting of the electronic thermal O L relay Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial un...

Страница 124: ...function Install an external thermal relay to each motor When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small the protective characteristics of the electronic over current protection will be deterio rated In this case use an external thermal relay A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function Use an exter nal thermal relay P...

Страница 125: ...nsorless vector control and vector control and Pr 84 Rated motor frequency is valid V F V F V F Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until P 3 Pr 3 appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 50 00 appears Turn the digital d...

Страница 126: ...r torque in the low frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque 00052 to 00126 4 00170 00250 3 00310 to 01800 2 02160 or more 1 Example 쑴 When the motor with a load does not rotate increase the Pr 0 value 1 by 1 unit by look ing at the motor movement The guideline is for about 10 change at the greatest Fig 5 3 Relation between output frequency and output volta...

Страница 127: ...s and activate the real sensorless vector control by Pr 800 The Pr 0 setting is invalid under advanced magnetic flux vector control real sensorless vector control and vector control Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until P 0 Pr 0 appears Press the SET ...

Страница 128: ...put frequency 02160 or more 60Hz 2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency Example 쑴 You can limit the motor speed Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer etc to 50Hz maximum Set 50 Hz to Pr 1 Maximum frequency Fig 5 5 Minimum and maximum output frequency I001100E Pr 1 Pr 18 Clamped at the maximum frequency 5 10V 20mA Output frequency Hz Pr 2 Frequency settin...

Страница 129: ...tarting frequency value note that the motor will run at the set frequency according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on without entry of the command frequency Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until P 1 Pr 1 appears ...

Страница 130: ...ents setting The initial value for the setting range is 0 to 3600s and setting increments is 0 1s Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description 7 Acceleration time 00250 or less 5s 0 3600s 0 360s Set the motor acceleration time 00310 or more 15s 8 Deceleration time 00250 or less 5s 0 3600s 0 360s Set the motor deceleration time 00310 or more 15s NOTE Too short acceleration deceleration times ...

Страница 131: ...ppears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 5 0 appears Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting value of 10 0 Press the SET key to set Operation Display The parameter number read previously appears Flicker Parameter setting complete PU indication is lit The initial value differs according to the capacity 앫 By turning the digital dial you can read another pa...

Страница 132: ... be performed by switching between the external and Net operation mode 3 External PU combined operation mode 1 Running frequency Start signal PU FR DU07 FR PU04 setting or external signal input multi speed set ting across terminals 4 5 valid when AU signal turns on External signal input terminal STF STR 4 External PU combined operation mode 2 Running frequency Start signal External signal input Te...

Страница 133: ...luctuation even at a severe load fluctuation To generate low speed torque To perform torque control The initial value of the 00023 and 00038 is set to 85 of the rated inverter current Use Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the terminals used for the X18 and MC signal Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description 9 Electronic thermal O L relay Inverter rated output current 01800 or less 0 500A Set the...

Страница 134: ...gle motor operation one motor run by one inverter should be performed The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m Perform offline auto tuning in the state where actual wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m NOTES Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V f control It is not suitable for machines such as grinding machine and wrapping machine whic...

Страница 135: ...rd motor 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary Other manufacturer s constant torque motor 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles according as required Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to page 5 13 Set the run command Refer to section 5 2 Testl run Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles number of poles in Pr 81 Number of m...

Страница 136: ...tion or reverse rotation command terminal STF or STR 2 Speed command Operation panel Setting by pressing the digital dial of the operation panel External analog command terminal 2 or 4 Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 or terminal 4 Multi speed command The external signals RH RM RL may also be used to give speed command 앫 Select online auto tuning as required Pr 95 R...

Страница 137: ...uring motor coasting under real sensorless vector con trol set to make frequency search of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure valid Pr 57 9999 Pr 162 10 b CAUTION Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the start command STF or STR is not input The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed ...

Страница 138: ...rque control and position control can be performed What is vector control Excellent control characteristics when compared to V f control and other control techniques achieving the control characteristics equal to those of DC machines It is suitable for applications below To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation To generate low speed torque To perform torque control or po...

Страница 139: ... 9999 V f Regelung aktiviert 81 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 Set the number of motor poles 12 14 16 18 20 X18 signal ON V f control Set 10 number of motor poles 9999 V f control 359 Encoder rotation direction 1 0 1 369 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 4096 Set the number of pulses of the encoder Set the number of pulses before multiplied by four 800 Control method selection 20 0 Speed cont...

Страница 140: ...to 55kW or vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU When using a motor other than the above other manufacturer s motor perform offline auto tuning without fail Single motor operation one motor run by one inverter should be performed Wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m NOTE...

Страница 141: ...Setting by pressing the digital dial of the operation panel External analog command terminal 2 or 4 Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 or terminal 4 Multi speed command The external signals RH RM RL may also be used to give speed command 앫 Perform offline auto tuning as required Pr 96 Refer to section 5 1 9 앫 Select online auto tuning as required Pr 95 Refer to sectio...

Страница 142: ...ity and the number of motor poles according as required Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to page 5 13 Test run Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles number of poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V f control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value 앫 Perform offline auto tuning as required Pr 96 Refer to section 5 1 9 앫 Select online auto tuning as require...

Страница 143: ...ing is 9999 initial value 앫 Set the electronic gear as required Refer to section 6 5 4 앫 Perform setting of positioning adjustment parameter as required Refer to section 6 5 5 앫 Select gain adjustment of position control as required Refer to section 6 5 6 Perform secure wiring Refer to section 3 2 Select a control method Refer to page 5 13 Aktivieren Sie die Drehzahlregelung durch Einstellung des ...

Страница 144: ...uning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor As the load is lighter tuning accuracy is higher Tuning accuracy does not change even if the inertia is large For the offline auto tuning you can select either the motor non rotation mode Pr 96 1 or rotation mode Pr 96 101 The rotation mode has higher tuning accurac...

Страница 145: ...run slightly Therefore fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or before tuning make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications Note that if the motor runs slightly tuning performance is unaffected Note the following when selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running Pr 96 Auto tuning setting statu...

Страница 146: ...d The motor runs at nearly its rated frequency Set the rated voltage of motor in Pr 83 Motor rated voltage and rated frequency of motor in Pr 84 Rated motor frequency Set Pr 71 Applied motor according to the motor used For other settings of Pr 71 refer to section 6 12 2 Motor Pr 71 Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR SF TH 3 SF JR 4P 1 5kW or less 23 SF HR 43 Others 3 ...

Страница 147: ...he operation panel Turning the start signal STF signal or STR signal off also ends tuning During offline auto tuning only the following I O signals are valid Input signals STOP OH MRS RT CS RES STF and STR Output terminal RUN OL IPF CA AM A1 B1 and C1 Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output from AM and CA when speed and output frequency are selected Since the RUN signal turn...

Страница 148: ...07 Diesplay Pr 96 1 101 1 101 Setting Tuning in progress Normal end Error end when inverter protective func tion operation is activated Tab 5 4 Display during tuning monitor display Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time Non rotation mode Pr 96 1 Approximately 25 to 120s Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and motor type Rotation mode Pr 96 101 Approximately 40s Offline auto tuning ti...

Страница 149: ...ctuation of power supply voltage 93 Calculation error A motor is not connected Überprüfen Sie den Motoranschluss und wied erholen Sie die Selbsteinstellung Tab 5 6 Parameter 96 setting NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again An instantaneous power failure occurring during tu...

Страница 150: ...uto tuning perform offline auto tuning without fail Operation method Check that 3 or 103 offline auto tuning completion is set in Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status Set 1 start time online auto tuning in Pr 95 Online auto tuning selection Online auto tuning is performed from the next starting When performing PU operation press the FWD or REV key of the operation panel For external operation turn on ...

Страница 151: ... resistance to be reflected on the control when the wiring length is long 30m or longer as reference Online auto tuning does not operate if the MRS signal is input if the preset speed is less than the Pr 13 Starting frequency or if the starting conditions of the inverter are not satis fied e g inverter error Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration or at a restart during DC brake op...

Страница 152: ...he machine Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description 818 Easy gain tuning response level set ting 2 1 15 Set the response level 1 Slow response to 15 Fast response 819 Easy gain tuning selection 0 0 Without easy gain tuning 1 With load estimation with gain calculation only under vector control and real sensorless vector control 2 With load Pr 880 manual input gain calculation 820 Speed co...

Страница 153: ... used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio for tuning Estimated value is set in Pr 880 during tuning The load inertia ratio may not be estimated well e g it takes a long time for estimation if the following conditions are not satisfied Time taken for acceleration deceleration to reach 1500r min is 5s or less Speed is 150r min or more Acceleration deceleration torque is 10 or more of the ...

Страница 154: ...gain tuning due to distur bance and such perform fine adjustment by manual input Set 0 without easy gain tuning in Pr 819 Easy Gain Tuning Selection Pr 819 Setting 0 1 2 Load inertia ratio Pr 880 Manual input a Inertia estimation result RAM by easy gain tuning is dispayed b Set the value in the following cases 쐌 Every hour after power on 쐌 When a value other than 1 is set in Pr 819 쐌 When vector c...

Страница 155: ... time taken at a speed change However a too short time will generate an overshoot When there is load inertia the actual speed gain is as given below Also when there is load inertia the actual speed gain decreases as indicated below JM Inertia of the motor JL Motor shaft equivalent load inertia Fig 5 14 Setting of the proportional gain I001483E I001484E Fig 5 15 Speed characteristic at load fluctua...

Страница 156: ...tion noise is not produced and set about 0 8 to 0 9 of that value Pr 821 If an overshoot occurs double the value until an overshoot does not occur and set about 0 8 to 0 9 of that value 3 Slow response Set the Pr 820 value a little higher Pr 820 When a speed rise is slow increase the value 5 by 5 until just before vibration noise is produced and set about 0 8 to 0 9 of that value 4 Long return tim...

Страница 157: ...ncoder specifications selection switch FR A7AP of differential complimentary 3 The encoder wiring is wrong 3 Check that FWD is displayed when running the motor in the clockwise direction from outside during a stop of the inverter with vector control setting If REV is displayed the encoder phase sequence is wrong Perform the correct wiring or match the Pr 359 Encoder rotation direction 4 The Pr 369...

Страница 158: ...load is heavy speed deviation will occur under P proportional control Select PI control 4 Motor speed is unstable 1 The speed command varies 1 1 Check that a correct speed command comes from the command device Take measures against noises 1 2 Decrease Pr 72 PWM frequency selection 1 3 Increase Pr 822 Speed setting filter 1 Refer to section 6 20 4 2 Insufficient torque 2 Increase the torque limit v...

Страница 159: ...peration is unstable 1 The speed control gains do not match the machine 1 1 Perform easy gain tuning Refer to sec tion 5 1 11 1 2 Adjust Pr 820 Pr 821 Refer to page 5 35 1 3 Perform speed feed foward control and model adaptive speed control 2 Slow response because of improper acceleration deceler ation time of the inverter 2 Change the acceleration deceleration time to an optimum value 8 Speed flu...

Страница 160: ...l Refer to section 5 2 1 Operation using the digital dial as the volume Refer to section 5 2 2 Change of frequency with ON OFF switches connected to terminals Refer to section 5 2 3 Frequency setting with a voltage output device Refer to section 5 2 4 Frequency setting with a current output device Refer to section 5 2 5 Fig 5 16 PU operation mode I001069E Motor Power supply Inverter ...

Страница 161: ... Fig 5 17 Frequency setting with the digital dial NOTES Press the digital dial to show the set frequency The digital dial can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation Refer to section 5 2 2 Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Turn the digital dial to show the frequency you want to set The frequency flickers for about ...

Страница 162: ...ting key lock operation selec tion setting may not be 1 Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop the frequency can be set by merely turning the digital dial Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU operation mode Change Pr 161 to the setting value of 1 Refer to section 4 3 7 for change of the setting Press the FWD or REV key to st...

Страница 163: ... and 10Hz Refer to section 5 3 2 to change frequencies using Pr 4 Pr 5 and Pr 6 Operation at 15 speed can be performed by turning on two or three terminals simultane ously I001072E Fig 5 19 Use switches to give the frequency command I000004aC Fig 5 20 Multi speed selection by external terminals Power supply Motor Inverter High speed Middle speed Low speed t RH RM RL Output frequency Hz Speed 1 hig...

Страница 164: ... to 4 Refer to section 5 1 6 I001487E Fig 5 21 Operate the inverter by using multi speed setting NOTE Refer to section 5 3 2 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr 4 Multi speed setting highspeed Pr 5 Multi speed setting middle speed and Pr 6 Multi speed set ting low speed Screen at powering on The monitor display appears Change the Pr 79 setting to 4 Refer to section 4 3 7 for cha...

Страница 165: ... selection must be set to 4 external PU combined operation mode 2 Use the FWD or REV key to give a start command The frequency setting potentiometer is supplied with 5V of power from the inverter terminal 10 I001075E Fig 5 22 Frequency setting by analog voltage input Power supply Motor Inverter Frequency setting potentiometer ...

Страница 166: ...g Press the start key FWD or REV Operation status indication FWD or REV flickers CAUTION When both the forward and reverse key are pushed the inverter will not start Also if both switches are pushed while running the inverter stops Acceleration constant speed Turn the volume frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full The frequency value on the indication increases according to Pr 7 A...

Страница 167: ... 4 external PU combined operation mode 2 Use the FWD or REV key to give a start command I001078E Fig 5 24 Frequency setting by analog current input NOTE Turn the AU signal on to activate the analog current input 0 4 to 20mA Use a jumper or the like as shown in Fig 5 24 Power supply Motor Inverter Output of the adjustment meter 0 4 to 20mADC AU signal ...

Страница 168: ...3 7 for change of the setting Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal AU is on Press the start key FWD or REV Operation status indication FWD or REV flickers CAUTION When both the forward and reverse key are pushed the inverter will not start Also if both keys are pushed while running the inverter stops Acceleration constant speed Perform 20mA input The frequency value on the indication i...

Страница 169: ...frequency setting by a voltage output device Refer to section 5 3 3 Perform frequency setting by a current output device Refer to section 5 3 4 5 3 1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel Pr 79 3 Set 3 in Pr 79 External PU combined operation mode 1 Switch terminal STF STR PC on to give a start command Refer to section 5 2 1 for the set frequency by the operation panel I001490E Fig 5 26 ...

Страница 170: ...the Pr 79 setting to 3 Refer to section 4 3 7 for change of the setting Turn the start switch STF or STR on The motor runs at the frequency set in the set frequency mode of the operation panel Turn the digital dial to change running frequency Display the frequency you want to set The frequency flickers for about 5s While the value is flickering press the SET key to set the frequency If you do not ...

Страница 171: ... 50Hz 30Hz and 10Hz Use Pr 4 Pr 5 and Pr 6 to change Operation at 15 speed can be performed by turning two or three terminals simultaneously Refer to section 6 10 1 I001086E Fig 5 28 Frequency and start command by switches I000004aC Fig 5 29 Multi speed setting in dependence on the terminals Power supply Motor Inverter Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start High speed Middle speed Low speed...

Страница 172: ...he PU EXT key to change to the external EXT operation mode If the operation mode still does not change set Pr 79 to change to the external operation mode Refer to section 5 1 6 Change the Pr 4 setting to 40 Refer to section 4 3 7 for change of the setting Turn on the high speed switch RH Turn the start switch STF or STR on 40Hz appears 30Hz appears when RM is on and 10Hz appears when RL is on Turn...

Страница 173: ...ection 1 Pr 182 RH terminal function selection 2 and Pr 59 Remote function selection 0 All are initial values The FWD or REV lamp is not lit Check that wiring is correct Check it again Check that 60 is set in Pr 178 STF terminal function selection or 61 is set in Pr 179 STR terminal function selection All are initial values How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed The setting differs accordi...

Страница 174: ...log voltage input The frequency setting potentiometer is supplied with 5V of power from the inverter terminal 10 I001090E Fig 5 31 Frequency setting by analog voltage input Power supply Motor Inverter Frequency setting potentiometer Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start ...

Страница 175: ...ode If the operation mode still does not change set Pr 79 to 0 to change to the external operation mode Refer to section 5 1 6 Turn the start signal STF or STR on Operation status indication FWD or REV flickers CAUTION When both the forward and reverse signal are turned on the inverter will not start Also if both switches turn on while running the inverter stops Acceleration constant speed Turn th...

Страница 176: ... Use the PU EXT key to change into the external operation mode Check that wiring is correct Check once again NOTES Change the frequency 0Hz of the minimum value of potentiometer at 0V initial value by adjusting the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias fre quency Refer to section 6 20 5 When you want to compensate frequency setting use terminal 1 ...

Страница 177: ...als 2 5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied Refer to section 6 20 5 for the setting method of calibration parameter C4 Turn the digital dial until P 125 Pr 125 appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 50 00 50 00Hz appears Turn the digital dial to change the set value to 40 00 40 00Hz Press the SET key to set Press the MODE key twice to choose monit...

Страница 178: ...9 Operation mode selection must be set to 2 external operation mode I001094E Fig 5 34 Frequency setting by analog current input NOTE Turn the AU signal on to activate the analog current input 0 4 to 20mA Use a jumper or the like as shown in Fig 5 34 Power supply Motor Inverter Output of the adjustment meter 4 to 20mADC Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start AU signal ...

Страница 179: ...tion is EXT If not displayed press the PU EXT key to change to the external EXT operation mode If the operation mode still does not change set Pr 79 to change to the external operation mode Refer to section 5 1 6 Turn the start signal STF or STR on Operation status indication FWD or REV flickers CAUTION When both the forward and reverse signal are turned on the inverter will not start Also if both...

Страница 180: ... in the terminals 4 5 and adjust at any point without a current flowing Refer to section 6 20 5 for the setting method of calibration parameter C7 Turn the digital dial until P 126 Pr 126 appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 50 00 50 00Hz appears Turn the digital dial to change the set value to 40 00 40 00Hz Press the SET key to set Press the MODE key twice t...

Страница 181: ...ed parameters enabled disabled Manual torque boost 0 Torque boost 0 1 6 4 3 2 1 0 30 Set the output voltage at 0Hz as Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity 6 168 46 Second torque boost 0 1 9999 0 30 Set the torque boost when the RT signal is on 9999 Without second torque boost 112 Third torque boost 0 1 9999 0 30 Set the torque boost when the X9 signal is on 9999 Without third t...

Страница 182: ...T signal is on 9999 Second V f is invalid 113 Third V f base frequency 0 01Hz 9999 0 400Hz Set the base frequency when the X9 signal is on 9999 Third V f is invalid Multi speed setting operation 4 Multi speed setting high speed 0 01Hz 50Hz 0 400Hz Set frequency when the RH signal is on 6 183 5 Multi speed setting middle speed 0 01Hz 30Hz 0 400Hz Set frequency when the RM signal is on 6 Multi speed...

Страница 183: ...tion deceleration time As acceleration deceleration time set the frequency change time from stop to Pr 20 21 Acceleration deceleration time increments 1 0 0 Increments 0 1s Range 0 3600s Increments and setting range of acceleration deceleration time setting can be changed 1 Increments 0 1s Range 0 360s 44 Second acceleration deceleration time 0 1 0 01 s 5s 0 3600 360s Set the acceleration decelera...

Страница 184: ...of the DC injection brake 6 241 9999 Operate when the output frequency becomes less than or equal to Pr 13 Starting frequency 11 DC injection brake operation time 0 1s 0 5s 0 DC injection brake disabled 0 1 10s Set the operation time of the DC injection brake 8888 Operate DC injection brake for the time X13 signal is on 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 1 4 2 1 0 DC injection brake disable...

Страница 185: ...constant torque lift boost for forward rotation 0 same as in setting 3 Jog operation 15 Jog frequency 0 01 Hz 5Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency for jog operation 6 186 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time 0 1 0 01 s 0 5s 0 3600s 360s Set the acceleration deceleration time for jog operation Set the time taken to reach the frequency set in Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency for acceler...

Страница 186: ...arting frequency 0 01Hz 50Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency at which the stall operation level is started to reduce 114 Third stall prevention operation current 0 1 150 0 Third stall prevention operation invalid 0 1 220 The stall prevention operation level can be set 115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency 0 01Hz 0 0 Third stall prevention operation invalid 0 01 400Hz Set the frequency at which ...

Страница 187: ...ensorless vector control or vector control Refer to page 6 6 for stall prevention operation level 6 80 803 Constant power range torque characteristic selection 1 0 0 Constant output limit torque cur rent limit and control 1 Constant torque limit torque limit and control 810 Torque limit input method selection 1 0 0 Internal torque limit Parameter set torque limit opera tion is performed 1 External...

Страница 188: ...evel 2 0 1 9999 0 400 When the torque limit selection TL signal is on the Pr 815 value is a torque limit value regardless of Pr 810 9999 Pr 22 value is used for limit 816 Torque limit level during acceleration 0 1 9999 0 400 Set the torque limit value during acceleration 9999 Same torque limit as at constant speed 817 Torque limit level during deceleration 0 1 9999 0 400 Set the torque limit value...

Страница 189: ...n stopping frequency 0 01Hz 1Hz 0 400Hz 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 1s 0 5s 0 360s 380 Acceleration Spattern 1 1 0 0 50 Valid when S pattern acceleration deceleration C Pr 29 4 is set Set the time taken for S pattern from starting of acceleration deceleration to linear acceleration as to the acceleration decelera tion time Pr 7 Pr 8 etc An acceleration deceleration pat tern can be ch...

Страница 190: ...rake unit MT BU5 20 Built in brake unit brake unit FR BU DC feeding mode 2 operated by switching between AC and DC 21 High duty brake resistor FR ABR brake unit MT BU5 70 Special regenerative brake duty 0 1 0 0 30 0 10 You can set the brake duty when a brake unit or power regeneration converter is used Setting can be made for the 01800 or more The setting depends on the inverter capacity 01800 or ...

Страница 191: ...1r min Detection of output fequecny and motor speed SU FU FU2 FU3 FB FB2 FB3 LS signal 41 Up to frequency sensitivity SU output 0 1 10 0 100 Set the level where the SU signal turns on 6 309 42 Output frequency detection FU output 0 01Hz 6Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB signal turns on 43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 0 01Hz 9999 0 400Hz Set the frequency where the FU...

Страница 192: ... output voltage peak value 13 Input power 14 Output power 17 Load meter 18 Motor excitation current 19 Position pulse Pr 52 20 Cumulative energization time Pr 52 21 Reference voltage output Pr 54 Pr 158 22 Orientation status Pr 52 23 Actual operation time Pr 52 24 Motor load factor 25 Cumulative power Pr 52 32 Torque command 33 Torque current command 34 Motor output 35 Feedback pulse Pr 52 50 Powe...

Страница 193: ...g time carrying over times 1 0 0 65535 The numbers of operation time monitor exceeded 65535h is dis played Reading only 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 1 9999 0 4 Set the number of times to shift the cumulative power monitor digit Clamp the monitor value at maxi mum 9999 No shift Clear the monitor value when it exceeds the maximum value Change of the monitor output from terminal C...

Страница 194: ...ncy 10 Frequency search at every start 11 Reduced voltage system at every start 12 Encoder detection frequency at every start 163 First cushion time for restart 0 1s 0s 0 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart Consider according to the magni tude of load inertia moment torque 164 First cushion voltage for restart 0 1 0 0 100 165 Stall prevention opera tion level for restart 0 1 150 0 220 Consi...

Страница 195: ...celeration 61 Reference current 0 01 0 1 A 9999 0 500 0 3600 A Setting value rated motor current is referenced The increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 6 178 6 208 9999 Rated inverter current is referenced 62 Reference value at acceleration 0 1 9999 0 220 0 220 is the setting range Low values for smooth accelera tion Pr 61 is the refere...

Страница 196: ...r the shortest and optimum acceleration decelera tion mode 1 Calculate only acceleration time for the shortest and optimum acceleration deceleration mode 2 Calculate only deceleration time for the shortest and optimum acceleration deceleration mode Retry function at alarm occurrence 65 Retry selection 1 0 0 5 An alarm for retry can be selected 6 351 67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 1 0 0 N...

Страница 197: ... the Mit subishi vector motor SF V5RU 40 Thermal characteristic of Mitsubi shi high efficiency motor SF HR 50 Thermal characteristic of Mitsubi shi constant torque motor SF HRCA 3 Standard motor Select offline auto tuning set ting 13 Constant torque motor 23 Mitsubishi standard motor SF JR 4P 1 5kW or less 33 Mitsubishi vector motor SF V5RU SF THY 43 Mitsubishi highefficiency motor SF HR 53 Mitsub...

Страница 198: ...pecifications as Pr 71 9999 Second motor is invalid Carrier frequency and Soft PWM selection 72 PWM frequency selection 1 2 0 15 0 6 25 PWM carrier frequency can be changed The setting displayed is in kHz Note that 0 indicates 0 7kHz 15 indicates 14 5kHz and 25 indicates 2 5kHz 25 is exclu sively for a sine wave filter The following settings are for real sen sorless vector control and vector contr...

Страница 199: ... terminal 2 0 1 100 0 100 Set the ratio of added compensa tion amount when terminal 2 is the main speed 243 Terminal 1 added com pensation amount terminal 4 0 1 75 0 100 Set the ratio of added compensa tion amount when terminal 4 is the main speed 252 Override bias 0 1 50 0 200 Set the bias side compensation value of override function 253 Override gain 0 1 150 0 200 Set the gain side compensation ...

Страница 200: ...n of Pr 822 valid when the RT terminal is on 836 Torque setting filter 2 0 001s 9999 0 5s 9999 Second function of Pr 826 valid when the RT terminal is on 849 Analog input offset adjustment 0 1 100 0 200 This function provides speed com mand by analog input terminal 2 with offset and avoids frequency command to be given due to noise under 0 speed command Reset selection disconnected PU PU stop 75 R...

Страница 201: ...ion disallowed 2 Forward rotation disallowed Operation mode selection 79 Operation mode selection 1 0 0 External PU switch over mode 6 415 1 Fixed to PU operation mode 2 Fixed to External operation mode 3 External PU combined operation mode 1 4 External PU combined operation mode 2 6 Switch over mode 7 External operation mode PU operation interlock 340 Communication start up mode selection 1 0 0 A...

Страница 202: ... flux vector control 100 is a referenced value 9999 Gain matching with the motor set in Pr 71 451 Second motor control method selection 1 9999 10 11 12 Select the method of controlling the second motor same as Pr 800 20 9999 V f Control advanced magnetic flux vector control 453 Second motor capacity 0 01kW 0 1kW 9999 0 4 55kW 0 3600kW Set the capacity of the second motor The increments and setting...

Страница 203: ...signal ON torque MC signal OFF speed 3 Position con trol 4 MC signal ON position MC signal OFF speed 5 MC signal ON torque MC signal OFF position 9 Vector control test operation Test operation of vector control speed control can be performed with out connecting a motor 10 Speed control Real sensorless vector control 11 Torque con trol 12 MC signal ON torque MC signal OFF speed 20 V f Control advan...

Страница 204: ... more 9999 Use the Mitsubishi motor SF JR SF HRCA constants 91 Motor constant R2 0 001Ω 0 01mΩ 9999 0 50Ω 0 400mΩ Tuning data The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set The increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 9999 Use the Mitsubishi motor SF JR SF HRCA constants 92 Motor constant L1 0 001Ω 0 1mH 0 01mΩ 0 01mH 9999 0...

Страница 205: ...setting range differ according to the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 9999 Use the Mitsubishi motor SF JR SF HRCA constants 456 Rated second motor voltage 0 1V 400V 0 1000V Set the rated voltage of the second motor 457 Rated second motor frequency 0 01Hz 50Hz 10 120Hz Set the rated frequency Hz of the second motor 458 Second motor constant R1 0 001Ω 0 01mΩ 9999 0 50Ω 0 400mΩ Tuning d...

Страница 206: ... 100 0 100Ω 0 100mH Tuning data of the second motor The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set The increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 9999 Use the Mitsubishi motor SF JR SF HRCA constants 463 Second motor auto tuning setting status 1 0 0 1 101 Set the tuning mode of the second motor same as Pr 96 684 Tuning data un...

Страница 207: ...Hz 9999 0 400Hz 9999 Set each points frequency volt age of V f pattern 9999 No V f setting 6 181 101 V f1 first frequency voltage 0 1V 0V 0 1000V 102 V f2 second fre quency 0 01Hz 9999 0 400Hz 9999 103 V f2 second frequency voltage 0 1V 0V 0 1000V 104 V f3 third frequency 0 01Hz 9999 0 400Hz 9999 105 V f3 third frequency voltage 0 1V 0V 0 1000V 106 V f4 fourth frequency 0 01Hz 9999 0 400Hz 9999 10...

Страница 208: ... length 1bit data length 7bit 11 Stop bit length 2bit data length 7bit 120 PU communication parity check 1 2 0 Without parity check 1 With odd parity check 2 With even parity check 121 Number of PU commu nication retries 1 1 0 10 Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value the inverter will come to an...

Страница 209: ... made but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode 0 1 9998s Set the communication check time interval same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No communication check 337 RS 485 communica tion waiting time set ting 1 9999 0 150ms 9999 Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response same specifications as Pr 123 341 RS 485 communica tion CR LF selectio...

Страница 210: ... Displayed in V mA C2 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 0 01Hz 0Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 2 input C3 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 1 0 0 300 Set the converted of the bias side voltage current of terminal 2 input C4 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 1 100 0 300 Set the converted of the gain side voltage of terminal 2 input C5 904 Termina...

Страница 211: ...action 20 PID reverse action Measured value terminal 4 Set point termi nal 2 or Pr 133 21 PID forward action 50 PID reverse action Deviation value signal input LON WORKS CC Link communication 51 PID forward action 60 PID reverse action Measured value set point input LONWORKS CC Link communica tion 61 PID forward action 70 PID reverse action Deviation value signal input PLC function 71 PID forward ...

Страница 212: ...inal 4 is equivalent to 100 9999 No function 132 PID lower limit 0 1 9999 0 100 Set the lower limit value If the process value falls below the setting range the FDN signal is output The maximum input 20mA 5V 10V of the measured value terminal 4 is equivalent to 100 9999 No function 133 PID action set point 0 01 9999 0 100 Used to set the set point for PID control in the PU operation mode 9999 Term...

Страница 213: ...d when an external thermal error occurs 139 Automatic switchover frequency between inverter and commer cial power supply operation 0 01Hz 9999 0 60Hz Set the frequency to switch the inverter operation to the commer cial power supply operation 9999 Without automatic switchover 159 Automatic switchover ON range between commercial power supply and inverter operation 0 01Hz 9999 0 10Hz Valid during au...

Страница 214: ...t detection level Suppose that the rated inverter current at the specified overload capacity is 100 153 Zero current detection time 0 01s 0 5s 0 1s Set this parameter to define the period from when the output cur rent drops below the Pr 152 value until the zero current detection signal Y13 is output 166 Output current detec tion signal retention time 0 1s 0 1s 0 10s Set the retention time when the...

Страница 215: ...ng only 9999 Batch clear the user group regis tration 173 User group registration 1 9999 0 999 9999 Set the parameter numbers to be registered to the user group Read value is always 9999 174 User group clear 1 9999 0 999 9999 Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from the user group Read value is always 9999 Operation selection of the operation panel 161 Frequency setting key lock operation sele...

Страница 216: ...t self holding selection 26 Control mode changing 27 Torque limit selection 28 Start time tuning 37 Traverse function selection 42 Torque bias selection 1 43 Torque bias selection 2 44 P PI control switchover 50 Sequence start 60 Forward rotation command assigned to STF terminal Pr 178 only 61 Reverse rotation command assigned to STR terminal Pr 179 only 62 Inverter reset 63 PTC thermistor input a...

Страница 217: ... 30 130 Forward rotation output 31 131 Reverse rotation output 32 132 Regenerative status output 33 133 Operation ready 2 34 134 Low speed output 35 135 Torque detection 36 136 In position 39 139 Start time tuning completion 41 141 Speed detection 42 142 Second speed detection 43 143 Third speed detection 44 144 Inverter running 2 45 145 Inverter running and start command is on 46 146 During decel...

Страница 218: ... response time of slip compensation When the value is made smaller response will be faster However as load inertia is greater a regenerative over voltage E OV첸 error is more liable to occur 247 Constant output region slip compensation selection 1 9999 0 Slip compensation is not made in the constant output range fre quency range above the frequency set in Pr 3 9999 Slip compensation is made in the ...

Страница 219: ...circuit capacitor cooling fan and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not 6 527 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 1 100 0 100 Display the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit Reading only 257 Control circuit capacitor life display 1 100 0 100 Display the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor Readi...

Страница 220: ...according to the magni tude of the load specifications moment of inertia torque 263 Subtraction starting frequency 0 01Hz 50Hz 0 120Hz When output frequency Pr 263 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr 262 When output frequency Pr 263 Decelerate from output frequency 9999 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr 262 264 Power failure deceleratio...

Страница 221: ... 2 Hz to Pr 5 Hz is achieved 274 Current averaging fil ter time constant 1 16 1 4000 Set the time constant of the pri mary delay filter relative to the output current The time con stant ms is 0 75 Pr 274 and the initial value is 12ms A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response Stop on contact control 270 Stop on contact load torque high speed fre quency control selec tion 1 0 0 ...

Страница 222: ...et the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed about 0 2 to 0 3s 284 Deceleration detection function selection 1 0 0 Deceleration is not detected 1 If deceleration is not normal dur ing deceleration operation the inverter alarm E MB2 is provided to shut off the output and turn off the brake opening request signal BOF 285 Excessive speed devia tion detection fre quency 0 01Hz 9999 0 30Hz Wh...

Страница 223: ... Droop control is not exercised dur ing acceleration deceleration Droop compensa tion amount is determined using the rated motor frequency as ref erence 1 11 Droop control is always exercised dur ing operation with 0 limit When Pr 288 11 droop compensa tion amount is determined using the motor speed as reference 2 Droop control is always exercised dur ing operation without 0 limit Pulse train inpu...

Страница 224: ... is invalid terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is valid 2 Speed command source external Frequency setting from commu nication is valid terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is invalid 550 NET mode operation command source selection 1 9999 0 Communication option valid 1 Inverter RS 485 terminal valid 9999 Automatic recognition of the com munication option Normally the RS 485 terminals are vali...

Страница 225: ...6383 354 Position loop switchover position 1 96 0 8191 As soon as the current position pulse reaches the set position loop switchover position control is changed to position loop 355 DC injection brake start position 1 5 0 255 After changed to position loop DC injection brake is applied and the motor stops as soon as the cur rent position pulse reaches the set DC injection brake start position 356...

Страница 226: ...ng Pr 358 output fre quency for generating servo torque increases to the creep speed of Pr 352 gradually accord ing to the slope set in Pr 362 Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased a machine may hunt etc 363 Completion signal output delay time 0 1s 0 5s 0 5s The orientation complete signal ORA is output delaying the set time after in position zone is entered Also the si...

Страница 227: ...on speed inte gral time 0 001s 0 333s 0 20 0 s 398 Orientation speed gain D term 0 1 1 0 100 0 Lag advance compensation gain can be adjusted 399 Orientation decelera tion ratio 1 20 0 1000 Make adjustment when the motor runs back at orientation stop or the orientation time is long Encoder feedback control 359 Encoder rotation direction 1 1 0 6 523 1 367 Speed feedback range 0 01Hz 9999 0 400Hz Set...

Страница 228: ...tion opera tion selection 1 0 0 PLC function is invalid 6 486 1 PLC function is valid Inverter reset is necessary to make this setting valid 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 1 0 0 The inverter start signal is made valid regardless of the sequence program execution key 1 The inverter start signal is made valid only when the sequence pro gram execution key is set to RUN When the sequence pro...

Страница 229: ... 0 0 65535 510 Parameter 5 for user 1 0 0 65535 511 Parameter 6 for user 1 0 0 65535 512 Parameter 7 for user 1 0 0 65535 513 Parameter 8 for user 1 0 0 65535 514 Parameter 9 for user 1 0 0 65535 515 Parameter 10 for user 1 0 0 65535 Position control 419 Position command source selection 1 0 0 Conditional position control func tion by contact input 6 127 2 Conditional position pulse train command ...

Страница 230: ... counter is cleared at trailing edge at the moment when H level is changed to L level 1 Deviation counter is cleared at L level 430 Pulse monitor selection 1 9999 Description FR DU07 PU 04 display 0 The cumula tive com mand pulse value is dis played Lower 4 5 digits 1 Upper 4 5 digits 2 The cumula tive feedback pulse value is displayed Lower 4 5 digits 3 Upper 4 5 digits 4 The droop pulses are mon...

Страница 231: ... 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 471 Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 RM RL Speed 4 Pr 24 472 Fourth position feed amount upper 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 473 Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 RH RL Speed 5 Pr 25 474 Fifth position feed amount upper 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 475 Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 RH RM Speed 6 Pr 26 476 Sixth position feed amount u...

Страница 232: ... 9999 REX RH RL Speed 13 Pr 237 490 Thirteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 491 Fourteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 REX RH RM Speed 14 Pr 238 492 Fourteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 493 Fifteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 REX RH RM RL Speed 15 Pr 239 494 Fifteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits 1 0 0 9999 Remot...

Страница 233: ...nverter station number 6 487 548 USB communication check time interval 0 1s 9999 0 USB communication is enabled However the inverter will come to an alarm stop E USB if operation is changed to PU operation mode 0 1 999 8s Set the interval of communication check time 9999 No communication check 551 Refer to Pr 338 and Pr 339 549 Refer to Pr 117 550 551 Refer to Pr 338 and Pr 339 Current average mon...

Страница 234: ... 3s Inverse time characteristics 3 HD Ambient temperature 50 C Overload current rating 200 60s 250 3s Inverse time characteristics 571 Refer to Pr 13 573 Refer to Pr 73 574 Refer to Pr 95 575 577 Refer to Pr 127 Traverse function 592 Traverse function selection 1 0 0 Traverse function invalid 6 520 1 Traverse function is valid only in the external operation mode 2 Traverse function is valid inde p...

Страница 235: ...que command value RAM EEPROM Speed limit 807 Speed limit selection 1 0 0 Use the speed command value during speed control as speed limit 6 117 1 According to Pr 808 and Pr 809 set the speed limit in forward and reverse rotation directions individ ually 2 The analog voltage of the terminal 1 input is used to make speed limit For 0 to 10V input set the forward rotation speed limit The reverse rotati...

Страница 236: ...reduces speed variation with disturbance 6 88 830 Speed control P gain 2 1 9999 0 1000 Second function of Pr 820 valid when RT signal is on 9999 No function Speed control integral time setting 821 Speed control integral time 1 0 001s 0 333s 0 20s Set the integral time during speed control Decrease the value to shorten the time taken for returning to the original speed if speed variation with distu...

Страница 237: ...setting 825 Torque control integral time 1 0 1ms 5ms 0 500ms Set the integral time for the cur rent control of the q and d axes Decreasing the value shortens the time taken to return to the original torque if current variation with dis turbance occurs 6 124 835 Torque control integral time 2 0 1ms 9999 0 500ms Second function of Pr 825 valid when the RT signal is on 9999 No function 826 Refer to P...

Страница 238: ...eed control is enabled 878 Speed feed forward filter 0 01s 0s 0 1s Set the primary delay filter for the speed feed forward result calcu lated using the speed command and load inertia ratio 879 Speed feed forward torque limit 0 1 150 0 400 Limits the maximum value of the speed feed forward torque 880 Load inertia ratio 0 1 7 0 200 Set the load inertia ratio Inertia ratio found by easy gain turning ...

Страница 239: ...00 Positive torque bias amount 0 to 400 843 Torque bias 3 9999 Without torque bias setting 844 Torque bias filter 0 001s 9999 0 5s Time until torque rises 9999 Same operation as when 0s is set 845 Torque bias operation time 0 01s 9999 0 5s Time for maintaining torque equiv alent to the torque bias amount 9999 Same operation as when 0s is set 846 Torque bias balance compensation 0 1V 9999 0 10V Set...

Страница 240: ...ue bias 9999 No function 859 860 Refer to Pr 82 Notch filter 862 Notch filter time constant 1 0 0 60 You can use the machine reso nance speed to make this setting to reduce the response level of the machine resonance frequency band avoiding machine reso nance 6 109 863 Notch filter depth 1 0 0 40dB 1 14dB 2 8dB 3 4dB Torque detection 864 Torque detection 0 1 150 0 400 You can make setting to outpu...

Страница 241: ...d 883 Regeneration avoid ance operation level 0 1V 760V 300 800V Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance operates When the bus voltage level is set to low overvoltage error will be less apt to occur However the actual deceleration time increases The set value must be higher than the power supply voltage 884 Regeneration avoid ance at deceleration detection sensitivity 1 0 0 Regen...

Страница 242: ...The setting depends on the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 894 Control selection during commercial power supply operation 1 0 0 Discharge damper control fan 1 Inlet damper control fan 2 Valve control pump 3 Commercial power supply drive fixed value 895 Power saving rate reference value 1 9999 0 Consider the value during com mercial power supply operation as 100 1 Consider the Pr 893 ...

Страница 243: ...c flux command calibration C12 917 Terminal 1 bias fre quency speed 0 01Hz 0Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 1 input valid when Pr 868 5 6 382 C13 917 Terminal 1 bias speed 0 1 0 0 300 Set the converted of the bias side voltage current of terminal 1 input valid when Pr 868 5 C14 918 Terminal 1 gain fre quency speed 0 01Hz 50Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency of terminal 1 input ...

Страница 244: ...58 1 4 989 Parameter copy alarm release 1 10 100 10 100 Parameters for alarm release at parameter copy The setting depends on the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more Buzzer control of the operation panel 990 PU buzzer control 1 1 0 Without buzzer 6 538 1 With buzzer PU contrast adjustment 991 PU contrast adjust ment 1 58 0 63 Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit FR PU04 F...

Страница 245: ...nline auto tuning This con trol can be applied to the following applications To minimize the speed fluctuation even at at a severe load fluctuation To generate low speed torque To prevent machine from damage due to too large torque torque limit To perform torque control Vector control When the FR A7AP is mounterd full scale vector control operation can be performed using a motor with encoder Fast ...

Страница 246: ...ausing the motor to develop a torque In vector control the voltage and output frequency are calculated to control the motor so that the excitation current and torque current as shown in the left figure flow to the optimum as described below The excitation current is controlled to place the internal magnetic flux of the motor in the optimum status Derive the torque command value so that the differe...

Страница 247: ...niques achieving the control characteristics equal to those of DC machines Applicable to high response applications with which induction motors were previously regarded as difficult to use Applications requiring a wide variable speed range from extremely low speed to high speed frequent acceleration deceleration operations continu ous four quadrant operations etc Allows torque control Allows servo...

Страница 248: ...ol magnetic flux control speed control slip calculation speed estimation PWM modulation pre excitation current control torque current control output voltage conversion current conversion calculation flux magnetic M 3 speed control slip calculation PWM modulation pre excitation current control torque current control output voltage conversion current conversion calculation flux magnetic M 3 Encoder ...

Страница 249: ...etic flux control The magnetic flux φ2 of the motor is derived from the excitation current id The excitation current command id is calculated to use that motor magnetic flux φ2 as a predetermined magnetic flux Excitation current control A voltage Vd is calculated to start a current id which is identical to the excitation current command id found by magnetic flux control Output frequency calculatio...

Страница 250: ...ferred to Refer to Section 80 Motor capacity 9999 01800 or less 0 4 55kW Set the applied motor capacity 178 189 450 804 807 810 858 868 Advanced mag netic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control vector control speed control Real sensorless vector control vector control torque control Vector control position control Input terminal function selection Second applied motor Torque com mand s...

Страница 251: ...marks 9999 0 Vector control Speed control 1 Torque control 2 Speed control torque control switchover MC ON Torque control MC OFF Speed control 3 Position control 4 Speed control position control switchover MC ON Position control MC OFF Speed control 5 Position control torque control switchover MC ON Torque control MC OFF Position control 9 Vector control test operation 10 Real sensorless vector co...

Страница 252: ...e use this terminal only for changing the control system of one motor For the terminal used for X18 signal input set 18 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the function V f control is selected when 12 14 16 18 20 is set in Pr 81 and the X18 signal is on When the X18 signal is not assigned turning the RT signal on selects V f control as the RT signal shares this f...

Страница 253: ...e limit torque command etc terminal functions also switch as below if control mode is switched Terminal 1 function according to control Pr 868 Real Sensorless Vector Control Pr 800 12 Vector Control Pr 800 2 Speed control MC signal OFF Torque control MC signal ON 0 initial value Speed setting auxiliary Speed limit auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command 2 Regenerative torque limit ...

Страница 254: ...OFF Torque control MC signal ON 0 initial value Speed command AU signal ON Speed limit AU signal ON 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command 4 Torque limit Pr 810 1 9999 Tab 6 7 Terminal 4 function when Pr 800 12 or 2 Pr 858 Vector Control Pr 800 4 Speed control MC signal OFF Position control MC signal ON 0 initial value Speed command AU signal ON 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command...

Страница 255: ...eration pre excitation Speed control position control switchover and torque control position control switchover is made when frequency drops to the Pr 865 Low speed detection and not switched during motor operation Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selec tion may affect the other functions Please make setting after confirming the function of each termi...

Страница 256: ...Pr 803 Pr 810 Pr 812 Pr 817 Pr 858 Pr 868 Pr 874 6 3 2 Gain adjustment of speed control Easy gain tuning Gain adjustment Pr 818 Pr 821 Pr 830 Pr 831 Pr 880 6 3 3 To enhance the trackability of the motor in response to a speed com mand change Speed feed forward control model adaptive speed control Pr 828 Pr 877 Pr 881 6 3 4 Stabilize the speed detection signal Speed detection filter Pr 823 Pr 833 6...

Страница 257: ...ation panel External command Setting by forward rotation or reverse rotation command terminal STF or STR 2 Speed command Operation panel Setting by pressing the digital dial of the operation panel External analog command terminal 2 or 4 Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 or terminal 4 Multi speed command The external signals RH RM RL may also be used to give speed com...

Страница 258: ...rming pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the start command STF or STR is not input The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed limit value 0 with a start command input Perform pre excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs For the 00023 to 00126 the speed deviation ma...

Страница 259: ...tation or reverse rotation command terminal STF or STR 2 Speed command Operation panel Setting by pressing the digital dial of the operation panel External analog command terminal 2 or 4 Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 or terminal 4 Multi speed command The external signals RH RM RL may also be used to give speed command 앫 Perform offline auto tuning as required Pr ...

Страница 260: ...imit level within the range 0 to 400 in Pr 22 When the TL signal is turned on torque limit level 2 functions You can select whether the torque limit level is set using parameters or analog input teminals terminal 1 4 In addition you can set torque limit level for forward power driving regeneration and reverse power driving regeneration operation individually NOTE Under real sensorless vector contr...

Страница 261: ... Pr 812 to Pr 817 0 1 r min 0 1 1 0 1 r min 10 1 r min 0 01 11 0 1 r min 812 Torque limit level regeneration 9999 0 400 Set the torque limit level for for ward rotation regeneration 9999 Limit at the value of Pr 22 or ana log terminal 813 Torque limit level 3rd quadrant 9999 0 400 Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation driving 9999 Limit at the value of Pr 22 or ana log terminal 814 Torqu...

Страница 262: ... 814 Torque limit level 4th quadrant When 9999 is set Pr 22 is the torque limit level I001501E Fig 6 7 Torque limit block diagram Pr Setting Range Torque Limit Input Method Description 810 0 initial value Internal torque limit Parameter set torque limit operation is per formed Changing the torque limit parameter value by communication enables torque limit to be input by communication 1 External to...

Страница 263: ...Pr 919 to C19 Pr 920 C38 Pr 932 to C41 Pr 933 Refer to section 6 20 6 Fig 6 9 Torque limit level by analog input I001503E I001504E Fig 6 10 Torque limit level by analog input Forward driving Forward regeneration Reverse driving Reverse regeneration Rated speed Speed Torque limit quad4 Pr 814 quad1 Pr 22 quad3 Pr 813 quad2 Pr 812 Forward rotation Reverse rotation Analog input terminal 1 4 or intern...

Страница 264: ...A7AP Pr 858 Pr 868 Real Sensorless Vector Control Speed Control Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function 0 initial value 0 initial value Speed command AU signal ON Speed setting auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command 2 3 4 Torque limit Pr 810 1 5 6 Torque bias Pr 840 1 to 3 9999 1 0 initial value Magnetic flux command Speed setting auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command 2 Magnetic flux command 3 4 Torque lim...

Страница 265: ... I001505E Fig 6 11 Second torque limit level NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selec tion may affect the other functions Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal I001506E Fig 6 12 Individual torque limit value during acceleration and deceleration Forward driving Forward regeneration Reverse driving Reverse regeneration Sp...

Страница 266: ... torque characteristic selection under torque limit operation NOTES The internal resolution of the torque limit is 0 024 100 212 and the fraction less than the resolution is rounded off When the torque limit setting increments have been changed 0 1 0 01 reset is nec essary because the settings of Pr 22 and Pr 812 to Pr 817 are multiplied by 1 10 ten times For example when 10 0 01 set in Pr 811 is ...

Страница 267: ... exceeds the level set in Pr 874 OLT level setting for 3s it is regarded as a stop effected by stall prevention and E OLT is output resulting in an alarm stop I001508E Fig 6 14 Alarm stop when torque limit is activated NOTES If the frequency has fallen to 0 5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s under V f control and advanced magnetic flux vector control an alarm E OLT appears to shu...

Страница 268: ...formance that matches the machine Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 818 Easy gain tuning response level set ting 2 1 15 Set the response level 1 Slow response to 15 Fast reponse 819 Easy gain tuning selection 0 0 Without easy gain tuning 1 With load estimation with gain calcu lation valid only during vector control 2 With load Pr 880 manual ...

Страница 269: ...utomatic setting Command Speed control position loop gain Model speed control gain Pr 820 Pr 821 Pr 828 Pr 422 Current control M 3 Load inertia moment Encoder Torque command Actual motor speed Load inertia ratio estimation section On when Pr 819 1 Load inertia ratio Pr 880 Gain table On when Pr 819 1 or 2 Easy gain tuning response level setting Pr 818 Easy gain tuning selection Pr 819 Speed positi...

Страница 270: ... ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio for tuning Estimated value is set in Pr 880 during tuning The load inertia ratio may not be estimated well e g it takes a long time for estimation if the following conditions are not satisfied Time taken for acceleration deceleration to reach 1500r min is 5s or less Speed is 150r min or more Acceleration deceleration torque is 10 or mor...

Страница 271: ...after executing easy gain tuning due to distur bance and such perform fine adjustment by manual input Set 0 without easy gain tuning in Pr 819 Easy Gain Tuning Selection Pr 819 Setting 0 1 2 Load inertia ratio Pr 880 Manual input a Inertia estimation result RAM by easy gain tuning is dispayed b Set the value in the following cases 쐌 Every hour after power on 쐌 When a value other than 1 is set in P...

Страница 272: ...he return time taken at a speed change However a too short time will generate an overshoot When there is load inertia the actual speed gain is as given below Also when there is load inertia the actual speed gain decreases as indicated below JM Inertia of the motor JL Motor shaft equivalent load inertia Fig 6 16 Setting of the proportional gain I001483E I001484E Fig 6 17 Speed characteristic at loa...

Страница 273: ... 821 If an overshoot occurs double the value until an overshoot does not occur and set about 0 8 to 0 9 of that value 3 Slow response Set the Pr 820 value a little higher Pr 820 When a speed rise is slow increase the value 5 by 5 until just before vibration noise is produced and set about 0 8 to 0 9 of that value 4 Long return time response time Set the Pr 821 value a little lower Decrease the Pr ...

Страница 274: ...tion when performing vector control with encoder gain adjustment according to the inertia can be easily done using easy gain tuning Pr 819 1 2 Speed trackability is poor Set a higher value in Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 Increase the value 10 by 10 until just before vibration or unusual noise is produced and set about 0 8 to 0 9 of that value If you cannot make proper adjustment increase the valu...

Страница 275: ...ime When the X44 signal is off PI control When the X44 signal is on P control For the terminal used for X44 signal input set 44 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the function I001510E Fig 6 18 Function block diagram NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Make setting after co...

Страница 276: ...heck the encoder specifications selection switch FR A7AP of differential complimentary 3 The encoder wiring is wrong 3 Check that FWD is displayed when running the motor in the clockwise direction from outside during a stop of the inverter with vector control setting If REV is displayed the encoder phase sequence is wrong Perform the correct wiring or match the Pr 359 Encoder rotation direction 4 ...

Страница 277: ...rol is selected 2 When the load is heavy speed deviation will occur under P proportional control Select PI control 4 Motor speed is unstable 1 The speed command varies 1 1 Check that a correct speed command comes from the command device Take measures against noises 1 2 Decrease Pr 72 PWM frequency selection 1 3 Increase Pr 822 Speed setting filter 1 Refer to section 6 20 4 2 Insufficient torque 2 ...

Страница 278: ...7 Machine operation is unstable 1 The speed control gains do not match the machine 1 1 Perform easy gain tuning Refer to sec tion 6 89 1 2 Adjust Pr 820 Pr 821 Refer to page 6 92 1 3 Perform speed feed foward control and model adaptive speed control 2 Slow response because of improper acceleration deceler ation time of the inverter 2 Change the acceleration deceleration time to an optimum value 8 ...

Страница 279: ...is exer cised 2 Model adaptive speed control is enabled 878 Speed feed forward filter 0 s 0 1s Set the primary delay filter for the speed feed forward result calculated using the speed command and load inertia ratio 879 Speed feed forward torque limit 150 0 400 Limits the maximum value of the speed feed forward torque 880 Load inertia ratio 7 0 200 Set the load intertia ratio to the motor 881 Spee...

Страница 280: ...peed controller This model speed is also used as the actual speed controller command The inertia ratio in Pr 880 is used for calculation of the torque current command value given by the model side speed controller The torque current command value of the model side speed controller is added to the output of the actual speed controller and the result is used as the iq current control input Pr 828 is...

Страница 281: ...ain tuning is displayed Manual input enabled only during a stop Manual input Speed control P gain 1 Pr 820 Manual input Tuning results are dis played Write disabled Tuning results are dis played Write disabled Speed control integral time 1 Pr 821 Manual input Tuning results are dis played Write disabled Tuning results are dis played Write disabled Model speed control gain Pr 828 Manual input Tunin...

Страница 282: ... C16 to C19 in the case a cage goes up when a motor runs forward 3 The terminal 1 based torque bias amount can be set automatically in C16 to C19 Pr 846 according to the load 9999 Without torque bias rated torque 100 841 Torque bias 1 9999 600 999 Negative torque bias amount 400 to 1 842 Torque bias 2 1000 1400 Positive torque bias amount 0 to 400 843 Torque bias 3 9999 Without torque bias setting...

Страница 283: ...as Amount OFF OFF 0 ON OFF Pr 841 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 OFF ON Pr 842 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 ON ON Pr 843 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 Tab 6 18 Setting torque bias amount with the contact input NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Make setting after confirming the function ...

Страница 284: ...842 975 for 25 Pr 843 925 for 75 쑶 Bias amount Torque command terminal 1 gain C18 C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 input Voltage for max load Voltage for balanced load Pr 846 Torque command terminal 1 bias C16 C17 Pr 919 Fall time torque bias terminal 1 bias Pr 848 Terminal 1 input Voltage for max load Fall time torque bias terminal 1 gain Pr 847 Voltage for balanced load Pr 846 Bias amount Bias amount Torqu...

Страница 285: ...oad When torque command is set from terminal 1 set 6 in Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment Setting C16 C17 Pr 919 C18 C19 Pr 920 Setting Pr 846 Operation without a load Read C16 C17 Pr 919 when speed is stable Press the SET key setting C16 C17 Pr 919 is completed Press the SET key setting C18 C19 Pr 920 is completed Read C18 C19 Pr 920 when speed is stable Operation with a maximum load Operatio...

Страница 286: ...eously with the start signal I001517E Fig 6 21 Torque output NOTES When torque bias is made valid and 6 is set in Pr 868 terminal 1 serves as torque com mand not as frequency setting auxiliary When override compensation is set by Pr 73 and terminal 1 acts as main speed no main speed main speed 0Hz is slected Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection ...

Страница 287: ... referred to Refer to Section 285 Excessive speed deviation detection frequency 9999 9999 Without speed deviation excessive 285 Overspeed detec tion frequency 6 13 5 0 30Hz If the difference absolute value between the speed command value and actual speed during speed con trol under vector control exceeds the Pr 285 Excessive speed devia tion detection frequency for more than the time set in Pr 853...

Страница 288: ...rt after instantaneous power failure Pr 57 9999 is selected when the setting of number of encoder pulses is smaller than the actual number the output speed is limited with the synchronous speed obtained by adding the maximum setting Pr 1 and Pr 873 setting When speed limit function is activated due to regenerative torque limit output torque may suddenly decrease In addition output phase error E LF...

Страница 289: ...tial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 862 Notch filter time constant 0 0 60 Refer to the following table 863 Notch filter depth 0 0 3 0 deep 3 sharrow Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Frequency 1000 500 333 3 250 200 166 7 142 9 125 111 1 Setting 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Frequency 100 90 9 83 3 76 9 71 4 66 7 62 5 58 8 55 6 52 6 Setting 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2...

Страница 290: ...rless Sensorless Set the motor Pr 71 Refer to section 6 12 2 Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to section 6 2 2 Test run Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V f control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value 앫 Select online auto tuning as required Pr 95 Refer to section ...

Страница 291: ...ikely to start during motor coasting under real sensorless vector con trol set to make frequency search of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure valid Pr 57 9999 Pr 162 10 b CAUTION Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the start command STF or STR is not input The motor may run also at a low speed...

Страница 292: ...9999 initial value 앫 Perform offline auto tuning as required Pr 96 Refer to section 6 12 3 앫 Select online auto tuning as required Pr 95 Refer to section 6 12 4 앫 Select manual input torque control gain adjustment Refer to page 6 92 Perform secure wiring Refer to section 3 2 Select a control method Refer to section 6 2 2 Set either 1 torque control 2 speed torque switchover or 5 position torque sw...

Страница 293: ...t in the con stant power region by torque limit set ting 868 C16 C19 Terminal 1 func tion assignment Terminal 1 bias gain torque 6 3 2 6 20 6 1 Constant torque limit 804 Torque command source selection 0 0 Torque command by terminal 1 analog input Refer to section 6 20 6 1 Torque command by parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 400 to 400 3 Torque com mand by parame ter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 400 t...

Страница 294: ...calibrated using calibration parameter C16 Pr 919 to C19 Pr 920 Refer to section 6 20 6 I001523E Fig 6 26 Block diagram Fig 6 27 Torque command by terminal 1 I001524E Analog input Parameter Pr 805 Pr 806 16 bit digital input FR A7AX Speed limit input Pr 804 Torque command source selectiont Speed estimated value Speed limit value Speed estimated value Speed limit value Encoder feedback in vector co...

Страница 295: ...shown on the left When changing the torque command frequently write to Pr 805 Performing frequent parameter write to Pr 806 will shorten the life of the EEPROM Fig 6 28 Torque command using parameters I001525E NOTE When torque command is set in Pr 805 RAM powering off the inverter will erase the changed parameter values Therefore the parameter value available when power is switched on again is the...

Страница 296: ...nge Incre ments 1 Torque command by parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 600 to 1400 400 to 400 1 3 Torque command by parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 600 to 1400 400 to 400 1 Torque command from remote resister RWw1 or RWwC with using CC Link communication FR A7NC 5 Torque command by parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 600 to 1400 400 to 400 1 Torque command from remote resister RWw1 or RWwC with ...

Страница 297: ...to Pr 808 and Pr 809 set the speed limit in forward and reverse rotation directions individu ally 2 Forward reverse rotation speed limit The analog voltage of the terminal 1 input is used to make speed limit The speed limit of the forward rota tion and reverse rotation is switched according to the polarity 808 Forward rotation speed limit 50Hz 0 120Hz Set the speed limit for the forward rotation d...

Страница 298: ...ol I001532E NOTES When the above speed limit command is greater than the Pr 1 Maximum frequency value the speed limit value is the Pr 1 Maximum frequency value and when the speed limit com mand is less than the Pr 2 Minimum frequency value the speed limit value is the Pr 2 Minimum frequency value Similarly when the speed limit command is smaller than Pr 13 Starting frequency the speed limit value ...

Страница 299: ...sing Pr 809 Reverse rotation speed limit The speed dur ing forward and reverse rotation is limited at the setting value of Pr 808 when 9999 initial value is set in Pr 809 I001533E Fig 6 32 Set the forward rotation and reverse rotation individually Speed limit Speed limit Speed limit Speed limit Speed Forward rotation Reverse rotation Pr 808 Pr 809 Output torque Drehmoment regelbereich Pr 7 Reverse...

Страница 300: ...d rotation reverse rotation speed limit NOTE When making speed limit from terminal 1 make calibration of terminal 1 Refer to section 6 20 6 b CAUTION When the actual speed reaches or exceeds the speed limit value torque control is switched to speed control to prevent overspeed SL appears on the operation panel during speed limit operation and the OL signal is output Refer to section 6 4 6 The forw...

Страница 301: ...STR signal PU operation FWD and REV key of FR DU07 FR PU07 or FR PU04 Torque command Select the input method of torque command and input the torque command Speed limit Select the input method of speed limit and input the speed limit value Tab 6 21 Signal input Speed limit value Speed limit value is increased up to preset value according to the Pr 7 Acceleration time setting Speed Start signal Outp...

Страница 302: ...rque command and load torque are balanced 5 The motor torque developing direction is determined by the combination of the torque com mand input polarity and start signal as indicated in the following table I001522E Fig 6 36 Transition operation Torque Command Polarity Torque Developing Direction STF signal ON STR signal ON Positive Forward rotation direction forward rotation driving reverse rotati...

Страница 303: ...ame manner as when 1 2 is set in Pr 261 Set linear acceleration deceleration Pr 29 0 initial value when torque control is exer cised When acceleration deceleration patterns other than the linear acceleration decelera tion are selected the protective function of the inverter may function Refer to section 6 11 3 m CAUTION Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control real s...

Страница 304: ...2 Pr 834 Torque control P gain 2 and Pr 835 Torque control integral time 2 are valid when the RT signal is on Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 824 Torque control P gain 1 100 0 200 Set the current loop proportional gain 100 is equivalent to 2000rad s 72 178 189 800 807 C16 C19 PWM frequency selection Input terminal function selection Contro...

Страница 305: ...causing the motor to generate sound synchronizing the cycle of current ripples Tab 6 23 Adjustment method for setting parameter 824 and 825 Phenomenon Cause Countermeasures 1 Torque control is not exer cised normally 1 The phase sequence of the motor or encoder wiring is wrong 1 Check the wiring Refer to section 3 2 2 The Pr 800 Control method selection setting is improper 2 Check the Pr 800 setti...

Страница 306: ...exercised dur ing acceleration decelera tion The motor vibrates The speed limit is activated When Pr 807 0 or 2 the speed limit may be activated since the speed limit value changes with the setting of the acceleration decel eration time in Pr 7 and Pr 8 Reduce the acceleration deceleration time Or set the acceleration deceleration time to 0 The speed limit during acceleration decel eration depends...

Страница 307: ...es from the encoder is zero to run the motor This inverter can perform conditional position feed by contact input and position control by inverter conditional pulse input Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Section Conditional position control by parameter setting Position command by parameter Pr 419 Pr 464 Pr 494 6 5 2 Position control by pulse train input of the inverter Position command...

Страница 308: ...section 6 5 5 앫 Gain adjustment of position control Refer to section 6 5 6 Perform secure wiring Refer to section 3 2 Select a control method Refer to section 6 2 2 Make speed control valid by selecting 3 position control 4 speed position switchover or 5 position torque switchover for Pr 800 Mount the FR A7AP Set Pr 71 Applied motor Pr 359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr 369 Number of encoder pu...

Страница 309: ...ed down The deviation counter maintains a given droop pulse value to keep the motor running When the command pulse input stops the droop pulses of the deviation counter decrease reducing the speed The motor stops when there are no droop pulses When the number of droop pulses has fallen below the value set in Pr 426 In position width it is regarded as completion of positioning and the in position s...

Страница 310: ...lses stop This time lag is necessary for maintaining the stop accuracy and called stop settling time I001536E Fig 6 39 Positioning NOTES For the servo on signal LX set 23 in Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the function For the in position signal Y36 set 36 in Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selec tion to assign the function Changing the terminal function usin...

Страница 311: ...ting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 419 Position command source selection 0 0 Conditional position control func tion by contact input position command by parameter settings 20 29 Acceleration decel eration reference frequency Acceleration decel eration pattern selection 6 11 1 6 11 3 2 Conditional pulse train position command by inverter pulse train input 464 Digital pos...

Страница 312: ... 0 9999 6 speed Pr 26 476 Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits 0 0 9999 477 Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits 0 0 9999 7 speed Pr 27 478 Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits 0 0 9999 479 Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits 0 0 9999 8 speed Pr 232 480 Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits 0 0 9999 481 Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits 0 0 9999 9 speed Pr 23...

Страница 313: ... I001537E Fig 6 40 Position command operation by parameter NOTES Acceleration deceleration time is 0 1s minimum and 360s maximum Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency is clamped at a minimum of 16 66Hz 500r min The acceleration deceleration patterns for position control are all linear acceleration and the setting of Pr 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection is invalid b CAUTI...

Страница 314: ...Position command source selection 0 0 Conditional position control function by contact input position command by parameter settings 52 178 189 DU PU main dis play data selection Input terminal function selection 6 3 2 6 15 2 2 Conditional pulse train position com mand by inverter pulse train input 428 Command pulse selec tion 0 0 2 Pulse train sign Sink logic 3 5 Source logic 429 Clear signal sele...

Страница 315: ...ith zero pulse signal of the encoder at home position operation etc deviation counter is cleared For the terminal used for CLR signal set 69 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the function Pr 428 Command Pulse Train Type At Forward Rotation At Reverse Rotation 0 2 Sink logic Pulse train sign 3 5 Sink logic IPulse train sign Tab 6 24 Setting of parameter 428 NOTE...

Страница 316: ...ulative feedback pulse value is dis played Lower 4 digits Lower 5 digits 3 Upper 4 digits Upper 5 digits 4 The droop pulses are monitored Lower 4 digits Lower 5 digits 5 Upper 4 digits Upper 5 digits 9999 Frequency monitor is displayed initial value Tab 6 25 Pulse monitor selection NOTES Count the number of pulses when the servo is on The cumulative pulse value is cleared when the base is shut off...

Страница 317: ...Using the parameters the travel per command pulse can be set separately to set the travel per command pulse without a fraction In addition the relationship between the motor speed and internal command pulse frequency is as follows fo Internal command pulse frequency pps No Motor speed r min Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 420 Command pulse...

Страница 318: ...system where the ballscrew pitch PB 10 mm and the reduction ratio 1 n 1 and the electronic gear ratio is Δs 10 mm when the number of feedback pulses Pf 4000 pulse rev According to the following expression Therefore set 4 in Pr 420 and 1 in Pr 421 Setting example 2 Find the internal command pulse frequency of the dedicated motor rated speed Note that the command pulse scaling factor Pr 420 Pr 421 1...

Страница 319: ... ts is needed from when the command has zeroed until the motor stops Set the operation pattern in consideration of the stop settling time When the initial value of Kp is 25 s 1 the stop settling time ts is 0 12s The positioning accuracy Δε is 5 to 10 Δl Δε mm Position command acceleration deceleration time constant Pr 424 When the electronic gear ratio is large about 10 or more times and the speed...

Страница 320: ... Excessive level error Pr 427 When droop pulses exceed the value set in Pr 427 position error large occurs and displays an error E OD to stop the inverter When you decreased the Pr 422 Position loop gain setting increase the error excessive level setting Also decrease the setting when you want to detect an error slightly earlier under large load When 9999 is set in Pr 427 position error large E OD...

Страница 321: ...Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 422 Position loop gain 25s 1 0 150s 1 Set the gain of the position loop 7 8 72 800 802 819 820 821 Acceleration time Deceleration time PWM frequency selection Control method selection Pre excitation selection Easy gain tuning selection Speed control P gain 1 Speed control inte gral time 1 6 11 1 6 11 1 6 19 1 6 2 2 6 13 1 6 3 3 6 3 3 6 3 3 ...

Страница 322: ...r 419 6 When 0 is set in Pr 419 Position command source selection the settings of posi tion feed amount in Pr 465 to Pr 494 are not correct 6 Check the position feed amount in Pr 465 to Pr 494 2 Position shift occurs 1 The command pulses are not input correctly 1 1 Check the command pulse form and command pulse selection Pr 428 set ting 1 2 Check that the command pulses are input normally Check th...

Страница 323: ...ou checked the speed control items Check the speed control measures Position shift occurs Have you made the electronic gear setting Set the electronic gear Pr 420 Pr 421 Do not turn off the forward reverse rotation stroke end signal before completion of positioning Motor or machine is hunting The position loop gain Pr 422 is high Perform easy gain tuning The speed control gain is high Decrease the...

Страница 324: ...etection filter Pr 823 Pr 827 Pr 833 Pr 837 6 6 1 Change the excitation ratio Excitation ratio Pr 854 6 6 2 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 823 Speed detection filter 1 0 001s 0 Without filter 0 001 0 1s Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the speed feedback signal 827 Torque detection filter 1 0s 0 Without filter...

Страница 325: ...se reduces use it with the initial value Increase the setting value gradually and adjust the value to stabilize the speed when torque ripples occur due to harmonic disturbance etc A too large value will run the motor unstably Use multiple primary delay filters Use Pr 833 and Pr 837 to change the filter accroding to applications Pr 833 and Pr 837 are valid when the RT signal is on NOTES The RT sign...

Страница 326: ...ls which repeat rapid acceleration deceleration up to high speed Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 854 Excitation ratio 100 0 100 Set the excitation ratio under no load I001543E Fig 6 44 Setting of the excitation ratio NOTE When 1 magnetic flux with terminal is set in Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment or Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assign...

Страница 327: ... Pr 453 Pr 454 Pr 569 Pr 800 6 7 2 Compensate for motor slip to secure low speed torque Slip compensation Pr 245 Pr 247 6 7 3 Limit output current to prevent inverter trip Stall prevention operation Pr 22 Pr 23 Pr 66 Pr 154 Pr 156 Pr 157 6 7 4 Change the overload current rating specifications Multiple rating setting Pr 570 6 7 5 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referre...

Страница 328: ...The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal by any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection Pr 112 Third torque boost is valid when the X9 signal is on For the terminal used for X9 signal input set 9 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the X9 signal function Fig 6 45 Relationship between output frequency and output voltage I000001C b CAUTION Adjust ...

Страница 329: ... long or when motor torque is insufficient in the low speed range If the setting is too large an overcurrent trip may occur Überstromauslösung kommen The Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 settings are valid only when V f control is selected When using the inverter dedicated motor constant torque motor with the 00170 or 00250 set the torque boost value to 2 If the initial set Pr 71 value is changed to the setting ...

Страница 330: ...ore 0 3600kW 9999 V f control 81 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 Set the number of motor poles 12 14 16 18 20 X18 signal ON V f control Set 10 number of motor poles 9999 V f control 89 Speed control gain magnetic flux vector 9999 0 200 Motor speed fluctuation due to load fluctua tion is adjusted during advanced magnetic flux vector control 100 is a referenced value 9999 Gain matching with th...

Страница 331: ...standard motor SF JR SF HR two pole four pole six pole 0 4kW or more or Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA SF HRCA four pole 0 4kW to 55kW When using a motor other than the above SF TH other manufacturer s motors etc perform offline auto tuning without fail Single motor operation one motor run by one inverter should be performed The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m P...

Страница 332: ...er s constant torque motor 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles according as required Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to section 6 2 2 Set the operation command Refer to section 6 22 1 Testl run Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles number of poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V f control is performed when the se...

Страница 333: ... the inverter and motor output torque may decrease 01800 or less When terminal assignment is changed using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection the other functions may be affected Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal Fig 6 47 Adjusting speed fluctuations I001544E Function RT signal ON second motor RT signal OFF first motor Applied motor Pr 450 Pr 71 Motor capac...

Страница 334: ...p compensation 246 Slip compensation time constant 0 5s 0 01 10s Used to set the slip compensation response time When the value is made smaller response will be faster However as load inertia is greater a regenerative over volt age E OV첸 error is more liable to occur 247 Constant output region slip compensation selection 9999 0 Slip compensation is not made in the constant output range fre quency ...

Страница 335: ...nt limit operation during acceleration deceler ation driving or regeneration Invalid under real sensorless vector control or vector control Stall prevention If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level the output frequency of the inverter isautomatically varied to reduce the output current Also the second stall prevention function can restrict the output frequency range in wh...

Страница 336: ...on 66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 50Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency at which the stall operation level is started to reduce 114 Third stall prevention opera tion current 150 0 Third stall prevention operation invalid 0 1 220 Stall prevention operation level can be changed with the X9 sig nal 115 Thrid stall prevention opera tion frequency 0Hz 0 Third stall prevention opera...

Страница 337: ... OL signal is output I001120E Fig 6 48 Stall prevention operation example NOTES If an overload status lasts long an inverter trip e g electronic thermal relay function E THM may occur When Pr 156 has been set to activate the fast response current limit initial setting the Pr 22 setting should not be higher than 170 The torque will not be developed by doing so When Pr 570 2 When real sensorless vec...

Страница 338: ...tall is executed Pr 157 Setting Description 0 Initial setting Output immediately 0 1 25s Output after the set time s has elapsed 9999 Not output Tab 6 29 Setting of parameter 157 Fig 6 49 Output of the OL signal I001330E NOTES The OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial setting The OL signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by setting 3 source logic or 103 sink logic to a...

Страница 339: ...n the current limiting in the frequency range starting at the frequency set by Pr 66 For example if Pr 66 is set to 75Hz the motor stall prevention operation level at an output frequency of 150Hz will be reduced to 75 when Pr 23 is set to 100 and to 66 when Pr 23 is set to 50 see the formula below Generally Pr 66 is set to 50Hz and Pr 23 to 100 Formula for stall prevention operation level When Pr ...

Страница 340: ...t in Pr 22 and Pr 48 has a higher priority When Pr 868 4 Stall prevention operation level analog input the stall prevention operation level also switches from the analog input terminal 1 input to the stall prevention operation level of Pr 48 when the RT signal turns on The second stall prevention operation level cannot be input in an analog form Fig 6 52 Second stall prevention operation current s...

Страница 341: ... to the RT terminal By setting 3 to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selec tion may affect the other functions Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal The RT X9 signal acts as the second third function selection signa...

Страница 342: ...al 4 analog current input set 4 in Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment Input 0 to 20mA to terminal 4 The AU signal need not be turned on Set the current limit level at the input voltage of 0V 0mA in Pr 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input Set the current limit level at the input voltage of 10V or 5V 20mA in Pr 149 Stall prevention level at 10V input I001546E Fig 6 55 Stall prevention operation...

Страница 343: ...come difficult to occur Use this function where a torque decrease will not pose a problem Pr 858 Pr 868 Real Sensorless Vector Control Speed Control Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function 0 initial value 0 initial value Frequency command AU signal ON Frequency auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command 2 3 4 Stall prevention 5 6 Torque bias 9999 1 0 initial value Magnetic flux command 1 Magnetic flux comm...

Страница 344: ...tall prevention are not activated OL signal and E OLT are not output The settings 100 and 101 allow operations to be performed in the driving and regener ation modes respectively The setting 101 disables the fast response current limit in the driving mode Pr 156 Setting Fast response Current Limit Stall Prevention Operation Level OL Signal Output Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration Without al...

Страница 345: ... vertical lift applications make setting so that the fast response current limit is not acti vated Torque may not be produced causing a drop due to gravity b CAUTION Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current Otherwise torque generated will reduce Always perform test operation Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time Stall prevention...

Страница 346: ... current LD rated current ND rated current HD rated current 6 212 22 Stall prevention oper ation level Setting Range 0 400 0 400 0 400 0 400 6 80 6 155 Initial Value 110 120 150 200 23 Stall prevention oper ation level compensa tion factor at double speed Setting Range 0 150 9999 0 200 9999 0 200 9999 0 200 9999 6 155 Initial Value 9999 9999 9999 9999 48 Second stall preven tion operation current ...

Страница 347: ... Initial Value SLD rated current LD rated current ND rated current HD rated current 6 532 893 Energy saving moni tor reference motor capacity Initial Value SLD value of applied motor capacity LD value of applied motor capacity ND value of applied motor capacity HD value of applied motor capacity 6 360 Tab 6 34 Influence of Pr 570 on other parameters 2 NOTE When Pr 570 0 or 1 Pr 260 PWM frequency a...

Страница 348: ...orm operation by avoiding machine resonance points Frequency jump Pr 31 Pr 46 6 8 2 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 1 Maximum frequency 01800 or less 120Hz 0 120Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency 13 15 125 126 Starting frequency Jog frequency Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequenc...

Страница 349: ...he Pr 2 setting NOTES When Pr 15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr 2 the Pr 15 setting has precedence over the Pr 2 setting When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency the output frequency may drop to Pr 2 or below b CAUTION If the Pr 2 setting is higher than the Pr 13 Starting frequency value note that the motor will run at the set frequency according to the accele...

Страница 350: ...A 3A are jump points and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump areas Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 31 Frequency jump 1A 9999 0 400Hz 9999 1A to 1B 2A to 2B 3A to 3B is frequency jumps 9999 Function invalid 32 Frequency jump 1B 9999 0 400Hz 9999 33 Frequency jump 2A 9999 0 400Hz 9999 34 Frequency jump 2B 9999 0 400Hz 999...

Страница 351: ...e entered in parameter 31 Frequency jump 1A In the diagram on the right the jump takes place at the beginning of the frequency area to be jumped for which the higher fre quency must be entered parameter 31 Frequency jump 1A I00019aC Fig 6 58 Selection of the jump point NOTE During acceleration deceleration the running frequency within the set area is valid Hz Hz Pr 32 1B Pr 31 1A Pr 31 1A Pr 32 1B...

Страница 352: ... Refer to Section 3 Base frequency 50Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency when the motor rated torque is generated 50Hz 60Hz 14 29 71 80 83 84 178 189 Load pattern selection Acceleration decel eration pattern selection Applied motor Motor capacity simple magnetic flux vector control Motor rated voltage Rated motor fre quency Input terminal function selection Advanced mag netic flux vector control Real sen...

Страница 353: ... with one inverter use the Pr 47 Second V f base frequency Pr 47 Second V f base frequency is made valid when the RT signal in ON and Pr 113 Third V f base frequency is made valid when the X9 signal is on Assign the terminal for X9 signal input using any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection I000003aC Fig 6 59 Output voltage related to the output frequency NOTES The RT X9 signal ac...

Страница 354: ...nverter will then use a V f pattern the rise of which is defined by Pr 3 and Pr 19 However the actual effective output voltage cannot be higher than the power supply voltage and is thus limited to this maximum value NOTES When operation is discontinued under vector control due to failure of an encoder etc set ting 20 in Pr 800 Control method selection enables V f control operation When advanced ma...

Страница 355: ...an or pump Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 14 Load pattern selection 0 0 For constant torque load 0 3 178 189 Torque boost Base frequency Input terminal func tion selection Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vec tor control 6 7 1 6 9 1 6 14 1 6 7 2 6 2 2 1 Quadratisches Lastmoment 2 For constant torque elevators at rever...

Страница 356: ...e g counterweight sys tem I001547E Fig 6 62 Characteristic with manual torque boost NOTE When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr 19 Base frequency voltage to prevent trip due to current at regeneration For vertical lift loads At forward rotation boost Pr 0 setting At reverse rotation boost 0 Lifts hoists elevators Pr 14 2 Pr 0 Ou...

Страница 357: ... setting is 2 5 EIN For constant torque load same as when the setting is 0 AUS For elevators at forward rotation boost of 0 same as when the setting is 3 Tab 6 36 Change load pattern selection using terminal NOTE The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial setting By setting 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection the RT signal can be assigned to the other te...

Страница 358: ...elevator mode 570 Multiple rating setting 6 7 5 02160 or more 0 3600A 9999 Rated inverter current value reference 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 9999 0 10 Set the starting frequency for the elevator mode 9999 Starting frequency 2Hz 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration 0 0 Normal mode 1 Minimum accelera tion deceleration without brake Refer to section 6 11 4 11 Minimum accelera tion dec...

Страница 359: ...celeration set the stall prevention operation level is changed as shown below I001549E Fig 6 63 Torque boost in dependence of the output current NOTE Stall prevention operation level automatically decreases according to the electronic thermal relay function cumulative value to prevent inverter overload shut off E THT E THM Overload Capacity 120 150 200 250 Pr 570 0 Pr 570 1 Pr 570 2 Pr 570 3 Stall...

Страница 360: ... value Starting frequency 2Hz Tab 6 39 Adjustment of elevator mode NOTES Even if automatic acceleration deceleration has been selected inputting the jog signal jog operation RT signal second function selection or X9 signal third function selection dur ing an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation or second and third function selection Note that JOG and...

Страница 361: ...44 50 53 54 Set 2 for adjustable 5 points V f control 3 19 12 113 47 60 71 Base frequency Base frequency voltage DC injection brake operation voltage Third V f base frequency Second V f base frequency Energy saving control selection Applied motor Advanced mag netic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control 6 9 1 6 9 1 6 13 1 6 9 1 6 9 1 6 18 1 6 12 2 6 2 2 6 2 2 100 V f1 first frequency 9...

Страница 362: ...r 71 to 2 set the rated voltage value in Pr 19 When the frequency values at each point are the same a write disable error Er1 appears Set the points frequencies voltages of Pr 100 to Pr 109 within the ranges of Pr 3 Base frequency and Pr 19 Base frequency voltage When 2 is set in Pr 71 Pr 47 Second V f base frequency and Pr 113 Third V f base frequency will not function When Pr 71 is set to 2 the ...

Страница 363: ...n selection Remote function selection Operation mode selection Input terminal function selection 6 10 2 6 10 3 6 10 4 6 22 1 6 14 1 5 Multi speed setting middle speed 30Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency when RM turns on 6 Multi speed setting low speed 10Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency when RL turns on 24 Multi speed setting speed 4 9999 0 400Hz 9999 Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can be set according ...

Страница 364: ... selection by external terminals NOTES In the initial setting if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected priority is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when the RH and RM signals turn on the RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority The RH RM RL signals are assigned to the terminal RH RM RL in the initial setting By setting 0 RL 1 RM 2 RH in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input...

Страница 365: ...ode Pr 24 to Pr 27 and Pr 232 to Pr 239 settings have no priority between them When a value other than 0 is set in Pr 59 Remote function selection the RH RM and RL signals are used as the remote setting signals and the multi speed setting becomes invalid When making analog input compensation set 1 in Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection The RH RM RL REX signals can be assigned to the inp...

Страница 366: ...ing Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 15 Jog frequency 5Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency for jog operation 13 29 20 21 79 178 189 Starting frequency Acceleration decel eration pattern selection Acceleration decel eration reference frequency Acceleration deceleration time increments Operation mode selection Input terminal function selection 6 11 2 6 11 3 6 11 1 6 11 1 6 22 1 6 1...

Страница 367: ...that the external operation mode is selected EXT indication is lit If not displayed press the PU EXT key to change to the external operation mode If the operation mode still does not change set Pr 79 to change to the external operation mode Turn the JOG switch on Turn the start switch STF or STR on The motor rotates while the start switch is ON It rotates at 5Hz initial value of Pr 15 Turn the sta...

Страница 368: ...p Press the PU EXT key to choose the PU JOG operation mode Press the FWD or REV key The motor rotates while the key is pressed It rotates at 5Hz initial value of Pr 15 Release the FWD or REV key to stop the motor When changing the frequency of PU JOG operation Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until Pr 15 JOG frequency appears Press the SET key to show t...

Страница 369: ...al using any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection When terminal assignment is changed the other functions may be affected Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal During jog operation the second acceleration deceleration via the RT signal cannot be selected The other second functions are valid refer to section 6 14 3 When Pr 79 Operation mode selection 4 ...

Страница 370: ...etting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 28 Multi speed input compensation selection 0 0 Without compensation 4 6 24 27 232 239 73 59 868 Multi speed operation Analog input selection Remote function selection Terminal 1 func tion assignment 6 10 1 6 20 2 6 10 4 6 20 1 1 With compensation NOTES Select the compensation input voltage 0 to 5V 0 to 10 and used terminal terminal ...

Страница 371: ...han multi speed or PU running frequency Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section RH RM and RL signal function Frequency setting storage function 59 Remote function selection 0 0 Multi speed setting 1 18 7 8 44 45 28 178 189 Maximum frequency High speed maximum frequency Acceleration time Deceleration time Second accelera tion deceleration time Seco...

Страница 372: ...he auxiliary input by terminal 1 becomes invalid PU operation Frequency set by RH RM operation PU running frequency Frequency setting storage The frequency setting storage function stores the remote setting frequency frequency set by RH RM operation into the memory EEPROM When power is switched off once then on operation is resumed with that output frequency value Pr 59 1 The frequency is stored a...

Страница 373: ... the start signal STF or STR is off turning on the acceleration RH or deceleration RM signal varies the preset frequency When switching the start signal from ON to OFF or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently set the frequency setting value storage function write to EEPROM invalid Pr 59 2 or 3 If set valid Pr 59 1 frequency is written to EEPROM frequently this will shorten the life ...

Страница 374: ... the remotely set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied after one minute has elapsed since turn off on of both the RH and RM signals I001134C Fig 6 75 Outputting the remotely set frequency stored last time I001135C Fig 6 76 Outputting the current set frequency b CAUTION When Pr 59 is set to 1 the motor will restart automatically after a power failure if there is an active rotation directio...

Страница 375: ... 29 125 126 178 189 Base frequency DC injection brake operation frequency Acceleration deceleration pattern selection Frequency setting gain frequency Frequency setting gain frequency Input terminal func tion selection 6 9 1 6 13 1 6 11 3 6 20 5 6 20 5 6 14 1 00310 or more 15s 8 Deceleration time 00250 or less 5s 0 3600s 0 360s Set the motor deceleration time 00310 or more 15s 20 Acceleration dece...

Страница 376: ...0 must be considered Set the deceleration time according to the following formula Fig 6 77 Acceleration deceleration time I000006E Example 쑴 When Pr 20 50Hz initial value Pr 13 0 5Hz The acceleration can be made up to the maximum operating frequency of 40Hz in 10s 쑶 Example 쑴 When Pr 20 120Hz Pr 10 3Hz The deceleration can be made up from the maximum operating frequency of 40Hz to a stop in 10s 쑶 ...

Страница 377: ... Pr 110 and Pr 111 are valid For the terminal used for X9 signal input set 9 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function When 9999 is set in Pr 45 or Pr 110 the deceleration time becomes equal to the second acceleration time Pr 44 Pr 111 When Pr 110 9999 third acceleration deceleration time is invalid The RT X9 signal acts as the second third function select...

Страница 378: ...ned to the RT terminal in the default setting By setting 3 to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection you can assign the RT signal to an other terminal The RT signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection When terminal assignment is changed the other functions may be affected Please make setting after confirming the f...

Страница 379: ...quency 0 5Hz 0 60Hz Frequency at start can be set in the range 0 to 60Hz You can set the starting fre quency at which the start signal is turned on 2 Minimum frequency 6 8 1 571 Holding time at start 9999 0 0 10 0s Set the holding time of Pr 13 Starting frequency 9999 Holding function at a start is invalid Fig 6 78 Starting frequency parameter I000008C NOTE The inverter will not start if the frequ...

Страница 380: ...mooth the motor drive at a start I000399C Fig 6 79 Holding time at start NOTES When the start signal was turned off during start time hold deceleration is started at that point At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation the starting frequency is valid but the start time hold function is invalid When Pr 13 0Hz the starting frequency is held at 0 01Hz Pr 571 Pr 13 Output frequency Hz...

Страница 381: ...klash acceleration stopping frequency 1 Hz 0 400 Hz Set the stopping frequency and time for backlash measures Valid when Pr 29 3 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 5 s 0 360 s 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 1 Hz 0 400 Hz 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 5 s 0 360 s 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 0 0 50 Valid when S pattern acceleration deceleration C Pr 29 4 is set Set ...

Страница 382: ...e in a short time to a high speed range of not lower than base frequency In this acceleration deceleration pattern Pr 3 Base frequency fb is the inflection point of the S pattern and you can set the acceleration deceleration time appro priate for motor torque reduction in a constant power operation region of Pr 3 Base frequency refer to Fig 6 81 Fig 6 80 Characteristic for parameter 29 0 I000015C ...

Страница 383: ...n engagement gap and have a dead zone between forward rotation and reverse rotation This dead zone is called backlash and this gap disables a mechanical system from following motor rotation More specifically a motor shaft develops excessive torque when the direction of rotation changes or when constant speed operation shifts to deceleration resulting in a sudden motor current increase or regenerat...

Страница 384: ... for forming an S pattern in Pr 380 to Pr 383 as acceleration time is 100 I001551E Abb 6 84 Characteristic for parameter 29 4 X20 During Acceleration During Deceleration AUS Pr 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 Pr 381 Deceleration S pattern 1 EIN Pr 382 Acceleration S pattern 2 Pr 383 Deceleration S pattern 2 Tab 6 41 Selection of acceleration deceleration curve S pattern 1 or S pattern 2 Abb 6 85 Para...

Страница 385: ...ommand and speed at a start of deceleration due to torque limit operation etc the speed command is matched with the speed to make dece leration Change the S pattern acceleration deceleration C switch X20 signal after the speed beco mes constant S pattern operation before switching continues even if the X20 signal is changed during acceleration or deceleration The X20 signal can be assigned to the ...

Страница 386: ...ecelerate immediately to avoid sudden frequency change Likewise the inverter will not immediately accelerate when deceleration is changed to reacceleration by turning the start signal on during deceleration etc Example 쑴 The actual acceleration time when starting the inverter with an S pattern acceleration dece leration pattern D selected for a stop to 50Hz in the parameter initial setting is as s...

Страница 387: ... pattern acceleration deceleration A to D Pr 29 1 2 4 5 is linear acceleration deceleration Set linear acceleration deceleration Pr 29 0 initial value when torque control is exer cised under real sensorless vector control or vector control When acceleration deceleration patterns other than the linear acceleration deceleration are selected the protective function of the inverter may function ...

Страница 388: ... 1 6 11 1 6 11 1 6 7 4 6 3 2 02160 or more 0 3600A 9999 Rated inverter output current value is refer ence 62 Reference value at acceleration 9999 0 220 Set the limit value during shortest optimum acceleration 9999 Shortest acceleration 150 is a limit value Optimum acceleration Pr 61 is reference 63 Reference value at deceleration 9999 0 220 Set the limit value during shortest optimum deceleration ...

Страница 389: ...tion operation level is used only during a constant speed operation Adjustment using Pr 61 to Pr 63 can not be made under real sensorless vector control or vector control since torque limit level Pr 22 etc is used during acceleration deceleration It is inappropriate to use for the following applications Machine with a large inertia such as a fan more than 10 times Since stall prevention operation ...

Страница 390: ...ote that the values changed at the fourth or later time are calculated to optimum and the values of Pr 0 Pr 7 and Pr 8 are set to RAM the values can be stored into EEPROM by reading and writing the values with the operation panel and paramter unit Either acceleration or deceleration can be made in the optimum acceleration deceleration mode using Pr 293 Acceleration deceleration separate selection ...

Страница 391: ...hange the reference level of acceleration and deceleration Shortest acceleration deceleration Set the stall pre vention operation level ratio to the current value of Pr 61 during acceleration deceleration Shortest acceleration deceleration Set the optimum current level ratio to the current value of Pr 61 dur ing acceleration deceleration 9999 initial value Shortest acceleration deceleration The 15...

Страница 392: ...se Parameters that must be set Refer to Section Motor protection from overheat Electronic thermal O L relay Pr 9 Pr 51 6 12 1 Use the constant torque motor Applied motor Pr 71 6 12 2 The motor performance can be maximized for operation in magnetic flux vector control method Offline auto tuning Pr 82 Pr 84 Pr 90 Pr 94 Pr 96 6 12 3 High accuracy operation unaffected by the motor temperature and stab...

Страница 393: ... is the operation region The region on the left of the characteristic curve is the non operation region When a value 50 of the inverter rated output current current value is set to Pr 9 The value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current It is not the percentage to the motor rated current When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the Mitsubishi constant torq...

Страница 394: ... function Install an external thermal relay to each motor When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small the protective characteristics of the electronic thermal relay function will be deterio rated In this case use an external thermal relay A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function Use the exter nal thermal relay ...

Страница 395: ...ion is not activated Fig 6 89 Operating two motors by a single inverter I001137C Pr 450 Second applied motor Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay Pr 51 Second electronic thermal O L relay RT OFF RT ON First Motor Second Motor First Motor Second Motor 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 왕 쐌 9999 0 9999 쐌 쐌 0 쐌 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 쐌 왕 왕 쐌 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 왕 쐌 9999 0 9999 쐌 왕 ...

Страница 396: ...minal used for OH signal input assign the function by setting 7 to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection NOTE The prealarm signal THP is also issued as soon as the thermal load of the IGBT output stages of the frequency inverter is 85 If the load rises further up to 100 then the thermal overload protection of the frequency inverter responds and the E THT error message is shown ...

Страница 397: ... mistor resistance values Fig 6 92 Connection of a PTC thermistor I001140E Fig 6 93 AU PTC switchover switch I001141E Motor Temperature PTC Thermistor Resistance Value Ω Normal 0 to 500 Boundary 500 to 4k Overheat 4k or higher Tab 6 45 Working area of the PTC function NOTES When the PTC signal was not assigned to Pr 184 and the AU PTC switchover switch was set to the PTC terminal function the func...

Страница 398: ...o Section 71 Applied motor 0 0 8 13 18 20 23 24 30 33 34 40 43 44 50 53 54 Selecting the standard motor or constant torque motor sets the corresponding motor thermal characteristic 0 12 80 81 453 454 82 84 90 94 96 455 463 859 860 95 574 451 800 100 109 Torque boost DC injection brake operation voltage Motor capacity Number of motor poles Second motor capacity Number of second motor poles Motor co...

Страница 399: ...ciency motor SF HR 50 Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF HRCA 3 Standard motor Select Offline auto tuning setting 13 Constant torque motor 23 Mitsubishi standard motor SF JR 4P 1 5kW or less 33 Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU SF THY 43 Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF HR 53 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF HRCA 4 Standard motor Auto tuning data can be read c...

Страница 400: ...Pr 12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to the Pr 71 setting as follows Pr 71 Standard Motor Setting 0 2 3 to 8 20 23 24 40 43 44 Constant Torque Motor Setting 1 13 to 18 50 53 54 Pr 0 3 2 Pr 12 4 2 Tab 6 47 Changes of parameter 0 and 12 related to parameter 71 ...

Страница 401: ...r 91 Motor constant L1 Pr 460 Pr 92 Motor constant L2 Pr 461 Pr 93 Motor constant X Pr 462 Pr 94 Auto tuning setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Online auto tuning selection Pr 574 Pr 95 Torque current Pr 860 Pr 859 Tab 6 48 Validation of parameters by the RT signal NOTES The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid Refer to section 6 14 3 The RT si...

Страница 402: ... 95 156 178 189 190 196 800 Acceleration time Deceleration time Electronic ther mal O L relay Applied motor Motor capacity Number of motor poles Online auto tuning selection Stall prevention operation selec tion Input terminal function selection Output terminal function selection Control method selection 6 11 1 6 11 1 6 12 1 6 12 2 6 2 2 6 2 2 6 12 4 6 7 4 6 14 1 6 14 5 6 2 2 80 Motor capacity 999...

Страница 403: ...s 0 500Ω 0 100 9999 02160 or more 0 100Ω 0 100 9999 96 Auto tuning setting status 0 0 Offline auto tuning is not per formed 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running 101 Offline auto tuning is performed with motor running 450 Second applied motor 9999 0 to 8 13 to18 20 23 24 30 33 34 40 43 44 50 53 54 Set when using the second motor same specifications as Pr 71 9999 Second motor is ...

Страница 404: ...Ω 0 400mH 9999 461 Second motor constant L2 9999 01800 or less 0 50Ω 0 1000mH 9999 02160 or more 0 3600mΩ 0 400mH 9999 462 Second motor constant X 9999 01800 or less 0 500Ω 0 100 9999 02160 or more 0 100Ω 0 100 9999 463 Second motor auto tuning setting status 0 0 Second motor auto tuning is not performed 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without second motor running 101 Offline auto tuning is per...

Страница 405: ... SF JRCA SF HRCA four pole 0 4kW to 55kW and vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU are used or the wiring length is long using the offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor As the load is lighter tuning accuracy is higher Tuning accuracy does not change even if the inertia is large For the of...

Страница 406: ...t enough during tuning The motor may be run at nearly its rated speed The brake is open No external force is applied to rotate the motor Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter FR ASFH connected to the 01800 or less and sine wave filter MT BSL BSC connected to the 02160 or more between the inverter and motor Remove it before sta...

Страница 407: ...tor runs at nearly its rated frequency Set the rated motor current initial value is rated inverter current in Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay Refer to section 6 12 Set the rated voltage of motor initial value is 400V in Pr 83 Motor rated voltage and rated motor frequency initial value is 50Hz in Pr 84 Rated motor frequency Set Pr 71 Applied motor according to the motor used Refer to section 6 12...

Страница 408: ...OP RESET key of the operation panel Turning the start signal STF signal or STR signal off also ends tuning During offline auto tuning only the following I O signals are valid initial value Input terminal STOP OH MRS RT CS RES STF and STR Output terminal RUN OL IPF CA AM A1 B1 and C1 Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output from AM and CA when speed and output frequency are se...

Страница 409: ...Panel FR DU07 Indication Pr 96 1 101 1 101 Setting Tuning in progress Normal end Error end when inverter protective func tion operation is activated Tab 6 50 Display during tuning monitor display Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time Non rotation mode Pr 96 1 Approximately 25 to 120s Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and motor type Rotation mode Pr 96 101 Approximately 40s Offline ...

Страница 410: ...ck for fluctuation of power supply voltage 93 Calculation error A motor is not connected Check the motor wiring and make setting again Tab 6 52 Settings for parameter 96 NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will resul...

Страница 411: ...2 0 9999 1 9999 92 Motor constant L1 0 9999 1 9999 93 Motor constant L2 0 9999 1 9999 94 Motor constant X 0 9999 1 9999 859 Torque current 0 9999 1 9999 Tab 6 54 Parameter setting ranges NOTES The display units of the motor constants read using Pr 684 Tuning data unit switchover can be changed Note that parameter values can not be changed When 9999 is set in Pr 90 to Pr 94 Mitsubishi motor SF JR S...

Страница 412: ...00 or less 0 50Ω 9999 0 001Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 400mΩ 9999 0 01mΩ 91 Motor constant R2 01800 or less 0 50Ω 9999 0 001Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 400mΩ 9999 0 01mΩ 92 Motor constant L1 01800 or less 0 50Ω 9999 0 001Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 3600mΩ 9999 0 01mΩ 93 Motor constant L2 01800 or less 0 50Ω 9999 0 001Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 3600mΩ 9999 0 01mΩ 94 Motor constant X 01800 or less 0 500Ω 9999 0 01Ω 99...

Страница 413: ...mary resistance R2 Secondary resistance l1 Primary leakage inductance l2 Secondary leakage inductance M Excitation inductance S Slip L1 l1 M Primary inductance L2 l2 M Secondary inductance Motor Pr 71 Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 SF JR 4P 1 5 kW oder kleiner 20 SF HR 40 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P SF TH constant torque 1 SF HRCA 4P 50 Vector co...

Страница 414: ...t L1 01800 or less 0 50Ω 9999 0 001Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 3600mΩ 9999 0 01mΩ 93 Motor constant L2 01800 or less 0 50Ω 9999 0 001Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 3600mΩ 9999 0 01mΩ 94 Motor constant X 01800 or less 0 500Ω 9999 0 01Ω 9999 02160 or more 0 100Ω 9999 859 Torque current 01800 or less 0 500A 9999 0 01A 9999 02160 or more 0 3600A 9999 0 1A Tab 6 59 Setting of parameter 82 90 to 94 and 859 Pr Name S...

Страница 415: ...t Pr 455 Pr 82 Motor rated voltage Pr 456 Pr 83 Rated motor frequency Pr 457 Pr 84 Motor constant R1 Pr 458 Pr 90 Motor constant R2 Pr 459 Pr 91 Motor constant L1 Pr 460 Pr 92 Motor constant L2 Pr 461 Pr 93 Motor constant X Pr 462 Pr 94 Auto tuning setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Tab 6 61 Validation of parameters by the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial settin...

Страница 416: ...r vector control Pr 800 is selected Before performing online auto tuning perform offline auto tuning Pr 96 without fail Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 95 Selbsteinstellung der Betriebmotordaten 0 0 Keine Selbsteinstellung 9 71 80 81 96 178 189 190 196 Electronic ther mal O L relay Applied motor Motor capacity Number of motor poles Auto tu...

Страница 417: ...hange in the temperature of the secondary resistance Vector control Pr 80 Pr 81 Pr 800 should be selected refer to section 6 70 Pr Description 9 Used as rated motor current and electronic thermal relay parameters 71 Applied motor 80 Motor capacity down to one rank lower than the inverter capacity note that the capacity should be 0 4kW to 55kW 81 Number of motor poles Tab 6 62 Related Parameters NO...

Страница 418: ...omatic restart after instantaneous power failure overrides when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected Start time online auto tuning is not performed at frequency search Perform online auto tuning at a stop with the X28 signal when using automatic restart after instantaneous power failure together Refer to the following for details Zero current detection and output current...

Страница 419: ... Pr 196 output terminal function selection and assign functions to the output terminal I001557E Abb 6 95 Start of online auto tuning using an external signal NOTES Start time tuning is performed when the start signal is turned on during zero speed control also The Y39 signal is in on status while secondary magnetic flux exists after the motor stop While the Y39 signal is on the X28 signal is not v...

Страница 420: ...0 Applied motor 453 Motor capacity down to one rank lower than the inverter capacity note that the capacity should be 0 4kW or more 454 Number of motor poles Tab 6 63 Related Parameters NOTES The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial setting By setting 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 18...

Страница 421: ...r shaft rotates due to external force The motor shaft position is maintained with servo lock The motor will return to the original posi tion if the motor shaft rotates due to external force Purpose Parameters that must be set Refer to Section Motor braking torque adjustment DC injection brake and zero speed control servo lock Pr 10 to Pr 12 Pr 802 Pr 850 6 13 1 Improve the motor braking torque wit...

Страница 422: ...t Pr 13 or less 11 DC injection brake operation time 0 5s 0 DC injection brake zero speed control disabled 0 1 to 10s Set the operation time of the DC injection brake zero speed control servo lock 8888 Operate when X13 signal is on 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 00250 or less 4 0 to 30 Set the DC injection brake voltage torque When 0 is set DC injection brake is disabled 00310 to 01800 2 ...

Страница 423: ...rminal used for X13 signal input set 13 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function When the motor does not stop due to large load moment J increasing the setting produces an effect Abb 6 97 When Pr 11 is set to 8888 I001559E NOTES When the X13 signal is turned on with Pr 11 8888 zero speed control is activated regardless of setting of Pr 850 Brake operation selection Under vector control ze...

Страница 424: ...uency set in Pr 10 NOTE For the 00170 and 00250 when the Pr 12 setting is as below changing the Pr 71 Applied motor setting changes the Pr 12 setting automatically it is not necessary to change the Pr 12 setting Parameter 12 4 initial value The Pr 12 setting is automatically changed to 2 if the Pr 71 value is changed to from the value selecting the standard motor 0 2 to 8 20 23 24 40 43 44 to the ...

Страница 425: ...r shaft position Note that if the shaft is turned by external force it returns to the original position after the external force has gone away Since position control is exercised you can adjust this position loop gain using Pr 422 Position loop gain Tab 6 64 Selection of pre excitation Control Method Control Mode Pr 802 Pr 850 Decelerates to Stop LX ON X13 ON Pr 11 8888 V f control DC Injection br...

Страница 426: ...w speed even when the start command STF or STR is not input The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed limit value 0 with a start command input Perform pre excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs Although FWD REV of the operation panel is not lit during pre excitation note that voltage is applied to the motor Note that when offline auto tuni...

Страница 427: ...power such as battery at occurrence of power failure Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 30 Regenerative function selection 0 Regeneration unit Terminal for po wersupplytothe inverter 57 178 189 190 196 261 Restart coasting time Input terminal function selection Ouput terminal function selection Power failure stop selection 6 16 1 6 14 1 6 14 ...

Страница 428: ... P N 11 R L1 S L2 T L3 P N 21 High power factor con verter FR HC power regeneration com mon converter FR CV P N 2 0 initial value Tab 6 66 Regeneration Unit and DC injection 01800 or less Regeneration Unit Terminal for power supply to the inverter Pr 30 Pr 70 Remarks Not used R L1 S L2 T L3 0 initial value P N 10 R L1 S L2 T L3 P N 20 Power regeneration con verter MT RC R L1 S L2 T L3 1 0 initial ...

Страница 429: ...ter FR HC MT HC or power regenerationcom mon converter FR CV Set 2 in Pr 30 The Pr 70 setting is made invalid Use any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function assignment to assign the following signals to the contact input terminals X10 signal FR HC MT HC connection FR CV connection inverter operation enable signal To make protective coordination with the FR HC MT HC or FR CV use the inverter o...

Страница 430: ...he DC power supply to terminal P and N Also remove jumpers across terminal R L1 R1 L11 and S L2 S1 L21 and connect terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 to terminal P and N The diagram below is a connection example I001561E Abb 6 99 Connection example for DC feeding mode 1 DC power Inverter M 3 Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start Frequency command Frequency setting potentiometer 1 kΩ 1 2 W Inrush ...

Страница 431: ... after additional Pr 57 set time has elapsed When the X70 signal turns off during inverter operation output is shutoff Pr 261 0 or the inverter is decele rated to a stop Pr 261 0 Set 70 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 X71 DC feeding cancel signal Turn this signal on to stop DC feeding When the X71 signal is turned on during inverter operation with turning on the X70 signal output is shutoff Pr 261 0 or...

Страница 432: ...ection I001562E Abb 6 100 Connection example for DC feeding mode 2 I001563E Abb 6 101 Operation example 1 at power failure DC power Inverter M 3 Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start DC feeding permission signal DC feeding cancel signal Frequency command Frequency setting potentiometer 1 kΩ 1 2 W Inrush current limit circuit DC feeding signal Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70...

Страница 433: ...uous operation is performed Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON Motor coasting Approx 150 ms Back up operation Power restoration Turns off after stop while running Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC DC ON ON ON AUS ON Back up operation Power restoration Remains on while ru...

Страница 434: ...al can also be used instead of the X10 signal Refer to section 3 8 for the connection of high duty brake resistor FR ABR brake unit high power factor converter FR HC MT HC and power regeneration common converter FR CV When AC power is connected to terminal R L1 S L2 T L3 during DC feeding with 2 10 11 20 or 21 DC feeding set in Pr 30 an option alarm E OPT occurs When DC feeding operation is perfor...

Страница 435: ...red to Refer to Section Start Signal STF STR Stop Operation 250 Stop selection 9999 0 100s STF Forward rotation start STR Reverse rotation start The motor is coasted to a stop when the preset time elapses after the start signal is turned off The motor is coasted to a stop Pr 250 1000 s after the start signal is turned off 7 8 13 Acceleration time Deceleration time starting frequency 6 11 1 6 11 1 ...

Страница 436: ...ion control Pr 419 0 앫 Power failure stop function Pr 261 앫 PU stop Pr 75 앫 Deceleration stop because of fault definition Pr 875 앫 Deceleration stop because of communication error Pr 502 앫 Offline auto tuning with motor running 앫 Emergency stop by LonWorks communication When the start signal is turned on again during motor coasting the motor starts at Pr 13 Starting frequency ...

Страница 437: ...ion selection Input terminal function selection 2 3 load torque high speed fre quency control 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 7 4 6 7 4 6 3 2 6 10 4 6 19 1 6 22 1 6 12 4 6 24 1 6 14 1 6 24 3 22 Stall prevention opera tion level 150 0 to 400 Set the stall prevention opera tion level for stop on contact control The smaller value set in either Pr 22 or Pr 48 has a priority 48 Second stall prevention operation curren...

Страница 438: ...peration command Middle speed operation command Stop on contact selection 0 Stop on contact selection 1 MC Mechanical brake Motor MCCB Power supply Pr 4 Pr 5 Pr 6 Normal mode Stop on contact control mode Time Output frequency ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF Goes into stop on contact control when both RL and RT switch on RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference a Acceleration time...

Страница 439: ... this function can cause the motor to overheat After a stop immediately change to a mechanical brake to hold the load Under the following operating conditions the stop on contact functionis made invalid 앫 PU operation Pr 79 앫 Jog operation JOG signal 앫 PU external operation Pr 79 앫 PID control function operation Pr 128 앫 Remote setting function operation Pr 59 앫 Start time tuning 앫 Orientation con...

Страница 440: ...eed 4 ON ON Pr 5 Multi speed setting middle speed ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Valid Pr 6 Multi speed setting low speed ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Valid Pr 6 Multi speed setting low speed ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Valid Pr 6 Multi spee...

Страница 441: ...0 Brake opening current detection time 0 3s 0 2s Generally set this parameter to about 0 1 to 0 3s 281 Brake operation time at start 0 3s 0 5s When Pr 292 7 set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened about 0 1 to 0 2s when Pr 292 8 282 Brake operation frequency 6Hz 0 30Hz Set the frequency to activate the mechanical brake by ...

Страница 442: ...ical brake Pr 184 15 Pr 190 20 NOTES When brake sequence mode is selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is invalid When using this function set the acceleration time to 1s or longer Changing the terminal function using any of Pr 178 to Pr 186 and Pr 190 to Pr 196 may affect the other functions Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal Start signal Multi spee...

Страница 443: ... the inverter starts running When the internal speed command reaches the value set in Pr 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr 279 the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal BOF after the time set in Pr 280 has elapsed When the time set in Pr 281 elapses after the brake opening completion signal BRI was activated the inverter increases the output frequency to t...

Страница 444: ... opening request signal BOF is turned off When the time set in Pr 283 has elapsed after the BOF signal is turned off the inverter output is switched off I001572E Fig 6 112 Operation when parameter 292 8 NOTE Even if automatic acceleration deceleration has been selected inputting the jog signal jog operation RT signal second function selection or X9 signal third function selection dur ing an invert...

Страница 445: ...B4 Although more than 2s have elapsed after the start command forward or reverse rotation is input the brake opening request signal BOF does not turn on E MB5 Although more than 2s have elapsed after the brake opening request signal BOF turned on the brake opening completion signal BRI does not turn on E MB6 Though the inverter had turned on the brake opening request signal BOF the brake opening c...

Страница 446: ... 352 as soon as the current position pulse reaches the creep switchoverposition set in Pr 353 353 Creep switchover position 511 0 to 16383 354 Position loop switcho ver position 96 0 to 8191 As soon as the current position pulse reaches the set position loop switcho ver position control is changed to position loop 355 DC injection brake start position 5 0 to 255 After changed to position loop DC i...

Страница 447: ...ion becomes faster when the value is increased a machine may hunt etc 363 Completion signal output delay time 0 5s 0 to 5 0s The orientation complete signal is out put delaying the set time after in posi tion zone is entered Also the signal turns off delaying the set time after in position zone is out 364 Encoder stop check time 0 5s 0 to 5 0s Orientation fault signal ORM is out put when the encod...

Страница 448: ...number of pulses of the encoder before multiplied by four 393 Orientation selection 0 0 Orientation is executed from the cur rent rotation direction 1 Orientation is executed from the for ward rotation direction 2 Orientation is executed from the reverse rotation direction 396 Orientation speed gain P term 60 0 to 1000 Response level during position control loop servo rigidity at orientation stop ...

Страница 449: ...unit NC etc or a terminating resistor is connected to other unit For the complementary set the switch to off position For terminal compatibility of the FR JCBL and FR A7AP refer to page 3 37 A separate power supply of 5V 12V 15V 24V is necessary according to the encoder power specification When performing encoder feedback control and vector control together an encoder and power supply can be share...

Страница 450: ...iption X22 Orientation command input Used to enter an orientation signal for orientation For the terminal used for X22 signal input set 22 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function SD Contact input common Common terminal for the orientation signal ORA Orientaiton complete signal output Switched low if the orientation has stopped within the in position zone while the start and orientation s...

Страница 451: ...ion command FR A7AX 16 bit data 9999 Initial value Orientation control invalid Tab 6 73 Settings for parameter 350 I001574E Fig 6 114 Encoder addresses Pr 360 Description 0 External position command is made invalid speed command or torque command with the FR A7AX 1 Position command direct input The 16 bit digital signal from the FR A7AX is directly serves as stop position command Example When the ...

Страница 452: ...n data is downloaded at the start of orientation Internal stop position command is given even if 1 external stop position command is set in Pr 350 when an option card FR A7AX is not mounted or Pr 360 0 Pr 350 Pr 360 Operation Stop position command 16 bit data FR A7AX Speed command 0 internal 0 Speed command Internal Pr 356 Speed command 16 bit data 1 2 to 127 position command Internal Pr 356 Exter...

Страница 453: ...se monitor When 19 is set in Pr 52 position pulse monitor is displayed instead of output volt age monitor of the PU Displayed only when the FR A7AP is mounted Orientation status When 22 is set in Pr 52 orientation status is displayed instead of output voltage monitor of the PU Displayed only when the FR A7AP is mounted 0 Other than orientation operation or orientation speed is not reached 1 Orient...

Страница 454: ...entation is not completed continusouly for the time set in Pr 365 Orientation limit after passing the creep switchover position the orientation fault signal ORM is output When the motor stops before the position pulse reaching the in position zone due to external force after orientation start and orientation completion signal ORA is not output orientation fault signal ORM is output after the time ...

Страница 455: ...time chart for orientation from stop 0 Main spindle speed encoder Pr 351 Pr 352 Start signal STF STR Orientation command X22 Current position signal Origin signal DC injection brake Orientation completion signal ORA Time Orientation speed set with Pr 351 Creep speed set with Pr 352 Creep switchover position set with Pr 353 Position loop switchover set with Pr 354 Stop position command DC injection...

Страница 456: ...o the orientation speed When the position signal is not within the creep switchover position the speed starts up tp the orientation speed The DC injection brake is operated if the position signal is within the DC injection brake start position 16 bit data with the FR A7AX is valid only when the DY signal is on Main spindle speed encoder Pr 351 Pr 352 Start signal Orientation command In Position Si...

Страница 457: ...voltage frequency speed time when performing orientation control orienta tion operation can not be completed Always set the DC injection brake enabled To terminate orientation the start signal STF or STR must be first switched off and the orientation signal X22 must be switched off As soon as this orientation signal is switched off orientation control ends Depending on the Pr 358 Servo torque sele...

Страница 458: ... 8 9 10 11 12 13 Servo torque function selection until output of the orientation com pletion signal ORA 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 With servo torque function Without servo torque function Retry function selection 쑗 쑗 쑗 With retry function Without retry function Output frequency is compensated when the motor stops outside the in position zone c 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 쑗 With frequency compensation Without frequency com...

Страница 459: ...nd switch operation selection between DC injection brake or servo torque When ending the orientation operation turn off the start signal STF or STR then turn off the orientation command X22 At this time you can select when to turn off the orientation completion signal ORA from between at turning off of the start signal or turning off of the orientation command signal Selection of completion signal...

Страница 460: ...When entered in the Pr 357 Orientation in position zone the orientation completion signal ORA will be output The zero point position origin can be moved using Pr 361 Position shift Pr 393 Rotation Direction Remarks 0 Initial value Pre orientation Orientation is executed from the current rotation direction 1 Forward rotation Orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction If the motor i...

Страница 461: ... stop will be executed Orientation from the reverse rotation direction If the motor is running in the reverse rotation direction it will make an orientation stop with the same method as orientation from the current rotation direction If the motor is running in forward it will decelerate the rotation direction will be changed to reverse run and then orientation stop will be executed Fig 6 120 Orien...

Страница 462: ...entation due to a break in the cable or the like To terminate orientation the start signal STF or STR must be first switched off and the orientation signal X22 must be switched off As soon as this orientation signal is switched off orientation control ends When performing orientation control make proper setting of Pr 350 Stop position command selection and Pr 360 16 bit data selection If the value...

Страница 463: ...th deviation Servo rigidity This is the response when a position control loop is configured When the servo rigidity is raised the holding force will increase the running will stabilize but vibration will occur easily When the servo rigidity is lowered the holding force will drop and the setting time will increase Rocking Movement in which return occurs if the stopping position is exceeded Limit cy...

Страница 464: ...niedrige Steifheit beim Stoppvorgang Tab 6 79 Adjustment of parameters 396 to 399 NOTES The arrows in the above table have the following meanings Increase the parameter setting value Do not change the parameter setting value Decrease the parameter setting value The numbers and in the table show the order of priority for changing the parame ters setting value b CAUTION Or if the motor does forward ...

Страница 465: ...ables stable orientation stop Note that the orientation time will increase I001590E Fig 6 122 Orientation speed NOTE When 19 is set in Pr 52 DU PU main display data selection position pulse monitor is dis played instead of PU output voltage monitor Frequency Hz Orientation speed Pr 351 Orientation start X22 Orientation completion ORA Encoder Z phase pulse Decelerate according to the deceleration r...

Страница 466: ...e output function Remote output Pr 495 Pr 497 6 14 9 Detect output torque Output torque detection Pr 864 6 14 8 Pr No Name Initial Value Initial Signal Setting Range Parameters referred to Refer to Section 178 STF terminal function selection 60 STF forward rotation command 0 20 22 28 37 42 44 50 60 62 64 71 9999 179 STR terminal function selection 61 STR reverse rotation command 0 20 22 28 37 42 4...

Страница 467: ...nal thermal relay input Pr 9 6 212 8 REX 15 speed selection combination with three speeds RL RM RH Pr 4 Pr 6 Pr 24 Pr 27 Pr 232 Pr 239 6 183 9 X9 Third function selection Pr 110 Pr 116 6 292 10 X10 Inverter operation enable signal FR HC MT HC FR CV connection Pr 30 Pr 70 6 247 11 X11 FR HC or MT HC connection instantaneous power failure detection 12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr 79 6 415 ...

Страница 468: ... X42 Torque bias selection 1 Pr 840 Pr 845 6 102 43 X43 Torque bias selection 2 44 X44 P PI control switchover Pr 820 Pr 821 Pr 830 Pr 831 6 88 50 SQ Sequence start Pr 414 Pr 417 Pr 498 Pr 506 Pr 515 6 486 60 STF Forward rotation command assigned to STF terminal Pr 178 only 6 294 61 STR Reverse rotation command assigned to STR terminal Pr 179 only 6 294 62 RES Inverter reset 63 PTC PTC thermistor ...

Страница 469: ...14 When the X10 signal FR HC MT HC FR CV connection inverter operation enable signal is not set the MRS signal shares this function When the PU operation external interlock X12 signal is not assigned at the Pr 79 Opera tion mode selection setting of 7 the MRS signal shares this function Use common terminals to assign multi speeds speed 7 and remote setting They cannot be set individually Common te...

Страница 470: ...the inverter With the MRS signal on the inverter cannot be operated if the start signal is entered into the inverter Coast the motor to a stop When the start signal is turned off the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time but when the MRS signal is turned on the motor coasts to a stop Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer ...

Страница 471: ...ed on Fig 6 124 Connection of the MRS terminal in source logic I000011C External MRS Communication MRS Pr 17 Setting 0 2 4 OFF OFF Operation enabled Output shutoff Output shutoff OFF ON Output shutoff Output shutoff Output shutoff ON OFF Output shutoff Output shutoff Operation enabled ON ON Output shutoff Operation enabled Output shutoff Tab 6 83 Output shutoff by external terminal or communicatio...

Страница 472: ...ng between normal use and emergency use Switching between heavy load and light load Changing of acceleration deceleration time by broken line acceleration deceleration Switching of characteristic between main motor and sub motor Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 155 RT signal function validity condition selection 0 0 Second third function is...

Страница 473: ...n Pr 95 Pr 574 6 236 Motor control method Pr 800 Pr 451 6 70 Speed control gain Pr 820 Pr 821 Pr 830 Pr 831 6 88 Analog input filter Pr 822 Pr 826 Pr 832 Pr 836 6 380 Speed detection filter Pr 823 Pr 833 6 144 Torque control gain Pr 824 Pr 825 Pr 834 Pr 835 6 124 Torque detection filter Pr 827 Pr 837 6 144 Tab 6 84 Functions that can be set as second or third functions NOTES The RT signal is assig...

Страница 474: ... values in Pr 4 to Pr 6 Multi speed setting high mid dle low speeds etc For multi speed operation refer to section 6 10 1 When Pr 250 is set to any of 1000 to 1100 8888 the STF signal becomes a start command and the STR signal a forward reverse command Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section Start Signal STF STR Stop Operation 250 Stop selection 9...

Страница 475: ... assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial setting The STF signal can be assigned to Pr 178 STF terminal function selection and the STR signal to Pr 179 STR terminal function selection only Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal Start signa...

Страница 476: ...e decelerates it to a stop Fig 6 129 3 wire type connection Pr 250 9999 I001150E Fig 6 130 3 wire type connection Pr 250 8888 I001151E NOTES The STOP signal is assigned to the terminal STOP in the initial setting By setting 25 in Pr 178 to Pr 189 the STOP signal can also be assigned to the other terminal When the JOG signal is turned on to enable jog operation the STOP signal becomes invalid If th...

Страница 477: ...700 EC 6 297 Start signal selection STF STR Setting Inverter Status Pr 250 0 to 100s 9999 Pr 250 1000 to 1100s 8888 OFF OFF Stop Stop OFF ON Reverse rotation ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation ON ON Stop Reverse rotation Tab 6 85 Start signal selection ...

Страница 478: ...m output 0 8 10 20 25 28 30 36 39 41 47 64 70 84 85 90 91 94 99 100 108 110 116 120 125 128 130 136 139 141 147 164 170 184 185 190 191 194 199 9999 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 9999 No function Setting Terminal Function Operation Related Parame ters Refer to Page Source Logic Sink Logic 0 100 RUN Inverter running Output during operation when the inverter output frequency rises to or above...

Страница 479: ...wer limit of PID control Pr 127 Pr 134 Pr 575 Pr 577 6 488 15 115 FUP PID upper limit Output when the feedback value rises above the upper limit of PID control 16 116 RL PID forward reverse rotation output Output when forward rotation is performed in PID control 17 MC1 Commercial power supply switchover MC1 Used when the commercial power supply inverter switch over function is used Pr 135 Pr 139 P...

Страница 480: ...s the Pr 42 Pr 50 Pr 116 setting Pr 42 Pr 50 Pr 116 6 309 42 142 FB2 Second speed detection 43 143 FB3 Third speed detection 44 144 RUN2 Inverter running 앫 Output during forward rotation or the reverse rotation signal is ON 앫 Output at deceleration even during forward rotation or the reverse rotation signal is OFF Does not output during pre excitation LX is ON 앫 Output during the orientation comma...

Страница 481: ... signal Output when an error occurs due to the circuit failure or connection alarm of the inverter 6 308 92 192 Y92 Energy saving average value updated timing Turned on and off alternately every time the power saving average value is updated when the power saving moni tor is used Cannot be set to Pr 195 and Pr 196 relay out put terminal Pr 52 Pr 54 Pr 158 Pr 891 Pr 899 6 360 93 193 Y93 Current ave...

Страница 482: ...unction is activated to stop the output major fault Pr 875 6 358 98 198 LF Minor fault output Output when a minor fault fan failure or communication error warning occurs Pr 121 Pr 244 6 445 6 526 99 199 ALM Alarm output Output when the inverter s protective function is acti vated to stop the output major fault The signal out put is stopped when a reset turns on 6 308 9999 No function Tab 6 86 Outp...

Страница 483: ...erter protective func tion is activated or the MRS signal is on The output is on during DC injection brake operation and off during an inverter stop This signal turns OFF during power failure or undervoltage I001152E Fig 6 131 Ready and motor running signals Output Signal Start Signal OFF during stop Start Signal ON during stop Start Signal ON during opera tion Under DC Injec tion Brake At Alarm O...

Страница 484: ...ive function is activated and the MRS signal is on For the RUN3 signal the output is on while the inverter is running and the start signal is on The RUN2 and RUN3 signals are on when the start command is on and even during pre exci tation with 0 set in speed command Note that the RUN2 signal turns off during preexcitation by turning the LX signal on The RY2 signal turns on at the start of pre exci...

Страница 485: ...op Start Signal ON during stop Start Signal ON during opera tion LX Si gnal is ON preex citation Under DC In jection Brake At Alarm Occur rence or MRS Sig nal ON output shutoff Automatic Restart after In stantaneous Power Failure Coasting Restart ing Start Signal is ON Start signalis OFF Start Signal is ON Start signalis OFF RY ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON RY2 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF RUN OFF OFF O...

Страница 486: ...e logic or 130 sink logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal When using the Y31 signal set 31 source logic or 131 sink logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal I001592E Fig 6 133 Forward and reverse rotation of the motor NOTES This signal is always off d...

Страница 487: ...hile the inverter is stopped and during preexcitation When using the Y32 signal set 32 source logic or 132 sink logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal I001593E Fig 6 134 Forward and reverse rotation of the motor NOTES This signal is always off during V f control advanced magnetic flux vector control or real sensorless vecto...

Страница 488: ...ke When using the Y91 signal set 91 source logic or 191 sink logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal I001153E Fig 6 135 Alarm signals No Alarm Definition 1 Inrush current limit circuit alarm E IOH 2 CPU error E CPU 3 CPU error E E6 4 CPU error E E7 5 Parameter storage device alarm E PE 6 Parameter storage device alarm E PE2 ...

Страница 489: ...iption Parameters referred to Refer to Section 41 Up to frequency sensitivity 10 0 100 Set the level where the SU signal turns on 190 196 874 Output terminal function selection OLT level setting 6 14 5 6 3 2 42 Output frequency detection 6Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB signal turns on 43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 9999 0 400Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB si...

Страница 490: ...rse rotation can also be set This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation rise and reverse rotation fall during elevator oper ation etc When Pr 43 9999 the Pr 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr 43 setting applies to reverse rotation When outputting a frequency detection signal besides the FU signal set the detection ...

Страница 491: ... FU signal is assigned to the terminal FU and the SU signal is assigned to the terminal SU in the initial setting All signals are OFF during DC injection brake pre excitation zero speed control servo lock or start time tuning The output frequency to be compared with the set frequency at the SU signal and LS signal differs according to the control method When terminal assignment is changed using Pr...

Страница 492: ...6 Output terminal function selection to assign the function of the Y12 signal to the output terminal Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 150 Output current detection level 150 0 220 Set the output current detection level 100 is the rated inverter current 190 196 Online auto tuning Offline auto tuning Output terminal function selection 6 12 3 6...

Страница 493: ...terminal function selection to assign the function of the output power detection signal Y13 to the output terminal I001156E Fig 6 139 Zero current detection NOTES This function is also valid during execution of the online or offline auto tuning The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 350ms When terminal assignment is changed using Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selecti...

Страница 494: ...r the TU signal set 35 source logic or 135 sink logic in Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection and assign functions to the output terminal Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 864 Torque detection 150 0 400 Set the torque value where the TU signal turns on 190 196 Output terminal function selection 6 14 5 I001597E Fig 6 140 Torque...

Страница 495: ...f by computer link communication from the PU connector or RS 485 port or by communication from the communication option Set 96 source logic or 196 sink logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection and assign the remote output REM signal to the terminal used for remote output Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 495 Remote...

Страница 496: ...By setting 0 the output terminal turns off on for sink logic As desired always 0 when read Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option FR A7AY is fitted RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option FR A7AR is fitted Example 쑴 When 96 source logic is set to Pr 190 RUN terminal function selection and 1 H01 is set to Pr 496 the terminal RUN turns on 쑶 I001157E Fig 6 141...

Страница 497: ...1158E Fig 6 142 ON OFF example for source logic NOTES The output terminal where the REM signal is not assigned using any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 does not turn on off if 0 1 is set to the terminal bit of Pr 496 or Pr 497 It turns on off with the assigned function When the inverter is reset terminal reset reset request through communication Pr 496 and Pr 497 values turn to 0 When Pr 495 1 11 however the...

Страница 498: ...eference of terminal CA and AM Pr 55 Pr 56 Pr 291 Pr 866 Pr 867 6 15 3 Adjust terminal CA AM outputs Terminal CA AM calibration Pr 900 Pr 901 Pr 930 Pr 931 6 15 4 Pr No Name Initial Setting Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 37 Speed display 0 0 Frequency display setting 52 80 81 800 811 DU PU main display data selection Motor capacity Number of motor poles Control s...

Страница 499: ...unication options other than FR A7ND FR A7NL FR A7NCA and running speed monitor is 0 1r min When both Pr 37 and Pr 144 have been set their priorities are as given below Pr 144 102 to 110 Pr 37 1 to 9998 Pr 144 2 to 10 When the running speed monitor is selected each monitor and setting are determined by the combination of Pr 37 and Pr 144 as listed below The units within the grayed line shown in Ta...

Страница 500: ...2 when you want to change the PU main monitor PU main display Since the panel display of the operation panel FR DU07 is 4 digits in length the monitor value of more than 9999 is displayed After setting the running speed in 0 1r min increments Pr 811 1 11 changing the set ting increments to 1r min increments Pr 811 0 10 changes the speed resolution from 0 1r min to 0 3r min four poles which may rou...

Страница 501: ...1 6 15 1 6 15 3 6 15 3 6 15 3 6 15 4 54 CA terminal function selection 1 output frequency 1 3 5 14 17 18 21 24 32 34 50 52 53 70 Select the monitor output to terminal CA 158 AM terminal function selection Select the monitor output to terminal AM 170 Watt hour meter clear 9999 0 Set 0 to clear the watt hour meter monitor 10 Set the maximum value when monitoring from communication to 0 to 9999kWh 99...

Страница 502: ...and Pr 144 settings refer to page 6 318 Motor torque 0 1 7 7 Pr 866 Display the motor torque in percent age on the assumption that the rated motor torque is 100 0 is displayed during V f control Converter output voltage 0 1V 8 8 800V Displays the DC bus voltage value Regenerative brake duty 0 1 9 9 Pr 70 Brake duty set in Pr 30 and Pr 70 Electronic thermal relay function load factor 0 1 10 10 100 ...

Страница 503: ...onitor value rated inverter current 100 Cumulative power 0 01kWh 0 1kWh 25 Cumulative power amount is displayed according to the output power monitor Use Pr 170 to clear the value Refer to page 6 328 Torque command 0 1 32 32 Pr 866 Display torque command value obtained from vector control Torque current command 0 1 33 33 Display torque current command value Motor output 0 01kW 0 1kW 34 34 Rated mo...

Страница 504: ...depends on capacities 01800 or less 02160 or more Since the panel display of the operation panel FR DU07 is 4 digits in length the monitor value of more than 9999 is displayed Types of Monitor Increments Pr 52 Pr 54 CA Pr 158 AM Setting Full scale value of the terminal CA and AM Description DU LED PU Main Monitor Input terminal status 55 ON OFF status of the input terminal is displayed on the PU R...

Страница 505: ... the monitor to be displayed on the first monitor and press the SET key for 1s To return to the output frequency monitor hold down the SET key for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor I001159E Fig 6 143 Displaying various types of monitor Example 쑴 When Pr 52 is set to 20 cumulative energizing time the monitor is displayed on the oper ation panel as described below I001160C Fig 6 144 S...

Страница 506: ...is lit dur ing running Parameter 52 0 100 During running stop During stop During running Output frequency Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Alarm display Alarm display Tab 6 93 Display during running and stop NOTES During an error the output frequency at error occurrence appears During MRS the values displayed are the same a...

Страница 507: ...7AR monitor Pr 52 57 the decimal point LED of the second digit LED is on Pr 52 Monitor Description 55 Displays the I O and output terminal ON OFF states of the inverter unit 56 Displays the input terminal ON OFF states of the digital input option FR A7AX 57 Displays the output terminal ON OFF states of the digital output option FR A7AY or relay output option FR A7AR Tab 6 94 I O terminal monitor I...

Страница 508: ...9999 the power returns to 0 and is recounted Writing 0 to Pr 170 clears the cumulative energizing power monitor Cumulative energizing time and actual operation time monitor Pr 171 Pr 563 Pr 564 On the cumulative energization time monitor Pr 52 20 the inverter running time is added up every hour On the actual operation time monitor Pr 52 23 the inverter running time is added up every hour Time is n...

Страница 509: ...ncrements are monitored the decimal places are dropped and the monitor displays an integer value 1 increments The monitor value of 0 99 or less is displayed as 0 1 When 2 decimal places 0 01 increments are monitored the 0 01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place 0 1 increments When the monitor display digit is originally in 1 increments it is displayed unchanged...

Страница 510: ...DC Set the frequency output frequency set frequency when the voltage output at terminal AM is 10V DC The analog voltage output at terminal AM and the frequency are proportional The maximum output voltage is 10V DC Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 55 Frequency monitoring reference 50Hz 0 400Hz Set the full scale value to output the output fr...

Страница 511: ...rence Pr 866 Set the current to be referenced when the torque monitor is selected for the terminal CA and ter minal AM display Set the current value when the current output at terminal CA is 20mADC The analog current output at terminal CA and the current value are proportional The maximum output current is 20mADC Set the current value when the voltage output at terminal AM is 10VDC The analog volt...

Страница 512: ... setting stabilizes the terminal AM output more but reduces the response level Setting 0 sets the response level to 4ms Adjustment of response level of terminal CA Pr 869 The response level of the output current of the terminal CA can be adjusted between 0 and 5s with Pr 869 Increasing the setting stabilizes the terminal CA output more but reduces the response level Setting 0 sets the response lev...

Страница 513: ...he full scale status of the corre sponding monitor item Calibration parameter C0 Pr 900 allows the output current ratios gains to be adjusted according to the meter scale Note that the maximum output current is 20mA DC Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section C0 900 CA terminal calibration Calibrate the scale of the meter con nected to terminal CA ...

Страница 514: ...he maximum frequency or current value at which you wish to output 20mA to the terminal Zero point calibration The zero point of the meter is calibrated with C9 Pr 930 The calibration display is shown in percent A value of 0 corresponds to approx 0mA a value of 20 to approx 4mA The value for the monitor signal up to which the minimum analog current is to be output is set with C8 Pr 930 Here too the...

Страница 515: ...ith C1 does not change when you turn the digital dial but the analog current output to AM will change as you turn the dial Confirm the calibration value found by pressing the SET key this assigns the maximum voltage output to the displayed value of the monitor signal NOTES If it is not possible to adjust the signal to be used for calibration to its maximum value you can set Pr 54 to 21 This output...

Страница 516: ...rn the digital dial until C appears Press set to display C Turn the digital dial until C 0 appears Set to C0 CA terminal calibration Press the SET key to enable setting If the inverter is at a stop press the FWD or REV key to start the inverter Motor needs not be connected Wait until the output frequency of 50Hz is reached Turn the digital dial to adjust the indicator needle to the desired positio...

Страница 517: ...erter operation when power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure when motor is coasting at start Purpose Parameters that must be set Refer to Section At instantaneous power failure occurrence restart inverter without stopping motor Automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure Pr 57 Pr 58 Pr 162 Pr 165 Pr 299 Pr 611 6 16 1 When under voltage or a power fail ure occurs ...

Страница 518: ...frequency search reduced voltage system 2 Encoder detection frequency search 10 Frequency search at every start 11 Reduced voltage system at every start 12 Encoder detection frequency search at every start 163 First cushion time for restart 0s 0 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart Consider using these parameters according to the load inertia moment torque magnitude 164 First cushion voltage...

Страница 519: ... failure selection signal CS is turned on automatic restart operation is enabled When Pr 57 is set to other than 9999 automatic restart operation enabled the inverter will not operate if used with the CS signal remained off NOTE The IPF signal is assigned to the terminal IPF in the initial setting The IPF signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by setting 2 source logic or 102 sink logic...

Страница 520: ...e load condition The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition Pr 299 Setting Pr 78 Setting 0 1 2 9999 Initial value With rotation direction detection Without rotation direction detection Without rotation direction detection 0 Without rotation direction detection 1 With rotation direction detection With rotation direction detection With rotation direction detection Tab 6 97 Ro...

Страница 521: ...ncy If more than one motor is connected to the inverter in parallel the frequency search on auto matic restart does not work correctly and over current error messages OCT are likely In such configurations deactivate frequency search set Pr 162 to 1 or 11 Then configure by trial and error starting with smaller values for Pr 164 and larger values for Pr 163 to find out whether the motor can be start...

Страница 522: ...iming differs according to the load condition The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition Fig 6 159 Under V f control or advanced magnetic flux vector control I000647C Abb 6 160 Under real sensorless vector control I001604E NOTE This system stores the output frequency prior to an instantaneous power failure and incre ases the voltage Therefore if the instantaneous power fail...

Страница 523: ...ers according to the load condition Restart operation at every start When Pr 162 10 11 or 12 automatic restart operation is also performed every start in addi tion to the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure When Pr 162 0 or 2 auto matic restart operation is performed at the first start after power supply on but the inverter starts at the starting frequency at the second time or lat...

Страница 524: ...ed motor speed output frequency prior to instantaneous power failure when Pr 162 1 or 11 Normally the initial value need not be changed for operation but adjust it according to the mag nitude of the moment J of inertia of the load or torque Pr 58 is invalid during encoder feedback control Pr 162 2 12 real sensorless vector con trol or vector control Automatic restart operation adjustment Pr 163 to...

Страница 525: ...ion Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when load torque high speed frequency control Pr 270 2 3 is set b CAUTION Before activating the automatic restart after power failure function please make sure that this mode is supported for the drive and permitted for your configuration When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected the motor ...

Страница 526: ...ut under voltage avoid ance When under voltage or a power failure occurs the inverter can be decelerated to a stop If power is restored during a power failure the inverter accelerates again 12 With under voltage avoid ance 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 3Hz 0 20Hz Normally operation can be performed with the initial value unchanged But adjust the frequency according to the magnitud...

Страница 527: ...power failure If an under voltage or power failure occurs the output frequency is dropped by the frequency set to Pr 262 Deceleration is made in the deceleration time set to Pr 264 The deceleration time setting is the time required from Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency to a stop When the frequency is low and enough regeneration energy is not provided for example the deceleration...

Страница 528: ...s invalid and the restart after instantaneous power failure operation is performed After a power failure stop the inverter will not start if the power supply is switched on with the start signal STF STR input After switching on the power supply turn off the start signal once and then on again to make a start I001175E Fig 6 166 Restart at power restoration Output frequency Power supply Pr 261 1 Dur...

Страница 529: ...y deceleration at an instan taneous power failure automatic restart operation is performed if automatic restart after instan taneous power failure has been selected Pr 57 9999 I001176E Fig 6 167 Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure I001177E Fig 6 168 Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure Output frequency Power supply Pr 261 2 When power is restored during decelerat...

Страница 530: ...erminal function selection to assign the function NOTE Undervoltage avoidance function is invalid during torque control by real sensorless vector control When Pr 261 11 12 the inverter operates in the same manner as when 1 2 is set in Pr 261 NOTES When Pr 872 1 Input phase failure protection provided and Pr 261 0 power failure stop function valid input phase failure protection E ILF is not provide...

Страница 531: ...2 Do not input output phase failure alarm Input output phase failure protection selection Pr 251 Pr 872 6 17 3 The motor is decelerated to stop at motor thermal activation Fault definition Pr 875 6 17 6 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 65 Retry selection 0 0 5 An alarm for retry can be selected 57 Restart coasting time 6 16 1 67 Number of r...

Страница 532: ...e cumulative count in Pr 69 is increased by 1 when a retry is regarded as successful after normal operation continues without alarms occurring for more than four times longer than the time set in Pr 68 after a retry start Writing 0 to Pr 69 clears the cumulative count During a retry the Y64 signal is on For the Y64 signal assign the function by setting 64 source operation or 164 sink operation to ...

Страница 533: ...rload shut off electronic thermal relay function E THT Inverter overload shut off electronic thermal relay function E IPF Instantaneous power failure protection E UVT Under voltage protection E BE Brake transistor alarm detection Internal circuit error E GF Output side earth ground fault over current protection E OHT External thermal relay operation E OLT Stall Prevention E OPT Option alarm E OP3 ...

Страница 534: ...lated data of the electronic thermal relay function regeneration converter duty etc are not cleared Different from the power on reset b CAUTION When you have selected the retry function stay away from the motor and machine unless required They will start suddenly after the reset time has elapsed after occurrence of an alarm When you have selected the retry function apply CAUTION seals in easily vi...

Страница 535: ...Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 76 Alarm code output selection 0 0 Without alarm code output 190 196 Output terminal function selection 6 14 5 1 With alarm code output 2 Alarm state Alarm code output No Alarm Output of information assigned with Parameter 190 196 Operation Panel Indication FR DU07 Output of Output Terminals Alarm Code SU IPF OL FU Normal 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Страница 536: ...itial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 251 Output phase failure protection selection 1 0 Without output phase failure protection 261 Power failure stop selection 6 16 2 1 With output phase failure protection 872 Input phase failure protection selection 0 0 Without input phase failure protection 1 With input phase failure protection NOTES If an input phase fai...

Страница 537: ...tion Parameters referred to Refer to Section 374 Overspeed detection level 140Hz 0 400Hz When the motor speed reaches or exceeds the speed set in Pr 374 during encoder feedback control real sensorless vector control or vector control over speed E OS occurs and stops the inver ter output I001606E Fig 6 171 Overspeed detection level and alarm occurrence Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Descrip...

Страница 538: ...e of an alarm other than OHT THM and PTC output is immediately shut off and an alarm is output Set 97 source logic or 197 sink logic in Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection and assign the ER signal to the output terminal This function is invalid during position control Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 875 Fault definition 0 0...

Страница 539: ...onitor Pr 52 Pr 54 Pr 158 Pr 891 Pr 899 6 18 2 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 60 Energy saving control selection 0 0 Normal operation mode 4 Energy saving operation mode NOTE For applications a large load torque is applied to or machines repeat frequent acceleration deceleration an energy saving effect is not expected When the energy savi...

Страница 540: ...et the load factor for commercial power supply operation Multiplied by the power consump tion rate page 6 365 during com mercial power supply operation 893 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity Applied motor Capacity 01800 or less 0 1 55kW Set the motor capacity pump capacity Set when calculating power saving rate average power saving rate value commercial operation power 02160 or more 0 ...

Страница 541: ... of power saving on the assumption that power during commercial power supply opera tion is 100 0 1 0 Ratio of power saving on the assumption that Pr 893 is 100 1 Power saving average value Average value of power saving amount per hour during predetermined time Pr 897 0 01kW 0 1kW 9999 9999 0 to 1000h Power saving rate average value Ratio of power saving average value on the assumption that the val...

Страница 542: ...saving amount Estimated value of annual power saving amount 0 01kWh 0 1kWh 9999 0 to 100 Annual power saving amount charge Annual power saving amount represented in terms of charge 0 01 0 1 0 to 500 Tab 6 100 Cumulative saving power monitor list NOTES As the operation panel FR DU07 is 4 digit display it displays in 0 1 increments since a carry occurs e g 100 0 when a monitor value in 0 01 incremen...

Страница 543: ...e value monitor can be displayed when a value other than 9999 is set in Pr 897 Power saving monitor average time The power saving average value monitor displays the average value per unit time of the power saving amount at averaging The average value is updated every time an average time has elapsed after the Pr 897 setting is changed power is turned on or the inverter is reset assuming as a start...

Страница 544: ...ssary If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr 891 9999 the power returns to 0 and is recounted The other monitors are clamped at the display maximum value The cumulative saving power monitor can measure the power amount during a predeter mined period Measure according to the following steps Write 9999 or 10 in Pr 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear Write 0 in Pr 898 at measurement start timin...

Страница 545: ... from the operation pattern and the ratio of speed to rating current output frequency Pr 3 Base frequency in the following chart From the motor capacity set in Pr 893 and Pr 892 Load factor the power estimated value kW during commercial power supply operation is found by the following formula Fig 6 174 Characteristic of the power consumption I001181C NOTE Since the speed does not increase above th...

Страница 546: ... rate estimated value and power saving average value monitor The annual power saving amount charge can be monitored by setting the power charge per hour in Pr 896 Power unit cost Calculate the annual power saving amount charge in the following method Example 쑴 Operation time rate setting example When operation is performed for about 21 hours per day and the monthly average operation days are 16 da...

Страница 547: ...iption Parameters referred to Refer to Section 72 PWM frequency selection 2 01800 or less 0 15 integral value PWM carrier frequency can be changed The setting displayed is in kHz The settings indicate the fol lowing frequencies 0 0 7kHz Settings between 1 14 correspond directly to the frequency values 15 14 5kHz 25 2 5kHz 156 570 Stall prevention operation selection Multiple rating set ting 6 7 4 ...

Страница 548: ...g independently of the load making the motor sound uniform Note that continuous operation should be performed at less than 85 of the inverter rating Multiple rating Pr 570 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction 0 120 Valid 1 150 Pr 260 0 Invalid Pr 260 1 Initial value Valid 2 Initial value 200 Invalid 3 250 Invalid Tab 6 102 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function NOTES Decreasing th...

Страница 549: ... input and compensation added compensation and override func tion Pr 73 Pr 242 Pr 243 Pr 252 Pr 253 6 20 3 Noise elimination at the analog input Input filter Pr 74 Pr 822 Pr 826 Pr 832 Pr 836 Pr 849 6 20 4 Adjustment calibration of analog input frequency and voltage cur rent Bias and gain of frequency setting volt age current Pr 125 Pr 126 Pr 241 C2 C7 Pr 902 Pr 905 C12 C15 Pr 917 Pr 918 6 20 5 Ad...

Страница 550: ...imit Pr 807 2 6 Torque bias input Pr 840 1 2 3 9999 Tab 6 103 Function of terminal 1 according to the control mode Pr 858 V f Control Advanced Magnetic Flux Vector Control Real Sensorless Vector Control Vector Control Vektorregelung Speed control Torque control Position control 0 Initial value Frequency command AU signal ON Speed command AU signal ON Speed limit AU signal ON 1 Magnetic flux comman...

Страница 551: ...ge Voltage current input switch Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 73 Analog input selection 1 0 to 5 10 to 15 Switch 2 OFF initial status You can select the input specifications of terminal 2 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 0 to 20mA and input speci fications of terminal 1 0 to 5V 0 to 10V Override and reversible operation can be selected 22 125 126 252 253 858 868 Stall prevention operation le...

Страница 552: ...and a voltage current input switch correctly then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting Incorrect setting as in the table below may result in failure Incorrect settings other than below can cause abnormal operation 4 2 Voltage current input switches Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 1 Terminal 4 input ON Current input initial status OFF Voltage input Switch 2 Terminal 2 input ON Current inp...

Страница 553: ... 5V 4 0 to 10V 0 to 10V Terminal 2 Override 5 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 6 0 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V Terminal 1 Added compensation 7 0 4 to 20mA 0 to 5V 10 0 to 10V 0 to 10V Yes 11 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 12 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 13 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 14 0 to 10V 0 to 10V Terminal 2 Override 15 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 16 0 4 to20mA 0 to 10V Terminal 1 Added compensation 17 0 4 to20 mA 0 to 5V 0 ON 0 to 10V Accordingto Pr 267 set ting 0...

Страница 554: ... to the main speed setting signal of the terminal 2 or 4 When an override is selected the terminal 1 or 4 is used for the main speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal 50 to 150 at 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V When the main speed of the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is not input compensation by the terminal 2 is made invalid Use Pr 125 Pr 126 frequency setting gain to change the maximum output f...

Страница 555: ... 14 in Pr 73 The initial value is 0 to 5V Setting 1 0 to 5V DC or 2 0 to 10V DC in Pr 267 changes the terminal 4 to the voltage input specification When the AU signal turns on the terminal 4 input becomes valid Fig 6 176 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 5V DC I001182E Fig 6 177 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 10V DC I001183E Terminal Inverter Built in Power Supply Voltage Frequency Setting Reso...

Страница 556: ...gnal need not be turned on Perform forward reverse rotation by analog input polarity reversible operation Setting any of 10 to 17 in Pr 73 enables polarity reversible operation Providing input 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V to the terminal 1 enables forward reverse rotation operation according to the polarity Fig 6 178 Frequency setting by the function Current input 0 4 to 20mA assigned to terminal 4 I001184...

Страница 557: ...ing or ter minal 4 initial value 0 4 to 20mA The added compensation for terminal 2 can be adjusted by Pr 242 and the compensation for terminal 4 by Pr 243 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 73 Analog input selection 1 0 3 6 7 10 13 16 17 Added compensation 28 73 Multi speed input compensation selection Analog input selection 6 10 3 6 20 2 4 5...

Страница 558: ...Auxiliary input characteristics NOTE When the Pr 73 setting was changed check the voltage current input switch setting Diffe rent setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction Refer to page 6 372 for setting Fig 6 182 Override connection diagram I001188E When voltage acrossterminals2 5 is 2 5V 5V Output frequency Terminal 1 5V 10V 2 5V 5V 2 5V 5V 5V 10V 0 STF signal ON Forward rotation Forward ...

Страница 559: ...TES When the Pr 73 setting was changed check the voltage current input switch setting Diffe rent setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction Refer to page 6 372 for setting The AU signal must be turned on to use the terminal 4 When inputting compensation to multi speed operation or remote setting set 1 compen sation made to Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection Initial value is 0 Set...

Страница 560: ...en switching two motors with one inverter use the Pr 832 Speed setting filter 2 Pr 832 Speed setting filter 2 is made valid when the RT signal turns on Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Value Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 74 Input filter time constant 1 0 8 Set the primary delay filter time constant for the analog input A larger setting results in a larger filter 73 125 C2 C4 ...

Страница 561: ...rque setting filter 2 Pr 836 Torque setting filter 2 is made valid when the RT signal turns on Offset adjustment of analog speed command input Pr 849 When speed command by analog input is set create the range where the motor remains stop to prevent malfunction at very low speed On the assumption that the Pr 849 setting 100 as 0 the offset voltage is offset as follows 100 Pr 849 positive side 100 P...

Страница 562: ...on Operation mode selection 6 11 1 6 20 2 6 20 2 6 22 1 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 50Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain maximum 241 Analog input display unit switchover 0 0 Displayed in Select the unit of analog input display 1 Displayed in V mA C2 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 0Hz 0 400Hz Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 2 in...

Страница 563: ...agnetic flux command C16 Pr 919 C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque mag netic flux Terminal 1 bias torque magnetic flux C18 Pr 920 C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque magnetic flux Terminal 1 gain torque magnetic flux 2 Regenerative torque limit C16 Pr 919 C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque mag netic flux Terminal 1 bias torque magnetic flux C18 Pr 920 C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain...

Страница 564: ...eed command C5 Pr 904 C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 126 C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C38 Pr 932 C39 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque mag netic flux Terminal 4 bias torque magnetic flux C40 Pr 933 C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque magnetic flux...

Страница 565: ...rminal 4 This is the fre quency corresponding to the minimum analog signal This parameter is set to a default value of 0Hz at the factory Parameter C6 Pr 904 sets the bias of the input signal on terminal 4 i e the minimum value of the analog signal connected to terminal 4 When the signal on this terminal is lower than this value the frequency set point value is limited to the value set with C5 Thi...

Страница 566: ...1191E Fig 6 187 Signal adjustment of terminal 4 NOTES When the terminal 2 is calibrated to change the inclination of the set frequency the setting of the terminal 1 is also changed When a voltage is input to the terminal 1 to make calibration terminal 2 4 analog value terminal 1 analog value is the analog calibration value When the voltage current input specifications were changed using Pr 73 and ...

Страница 567: ...minal 2 4 according to Pr 73 Pr 267 voltage current input switch Pr 241 0 initial value Pr 241 1 0 to 5V input 0 to 5V 0 to 100 0 1 is displayed 0 to 100 0 to 5V 0 01V is displayed 0 to 10V input 0 to 10V 0 to 100 0 1 is displayed 0 to 100 0 to 10V 0 01V is displayed 0 4 to 20mA input 0 to 20mA 0 to 100 0 1 is displayed 0 to 100 0 to 20mA 0 01mA is displayed Tab 6 110 Units when displaying the set...

Страница 568: ...appens stop the inverter repeat the set ting procedure and save your settings Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation mode indication The inverter must be at a stop The inverter must be in the PU operation mode using the PU EXT key Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until C appears Press the SET key to display C Turn the digital dial until C 4 C ...

Страница 569: ...gital dial until C 4 C 7 appears Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Press the SET key to display the analog value in V or mA voltage for C4 and current for C7 Turn the digital dial to set the gain of the voltage signal value If Pr 241 is set to 1 the value will be displayed directly CAUTION When you start turning the digital dial the value that is currently stored in this example 4V will ...

Страница 570: ...ncy to 120Hz or more Refer to page 6 168 Make the bias frequency setting using calibration parameter C2 Pr 902 or C5 Pr 904 Refer to page 6 385 b CAUTION Take care when setting any value other than 0 as the bias speed at 0V 0 4mA Even if a frequency command is not given merely turning on the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency Turn the digital dial until P 125 Pr 125 or P 126...

Страница 571: ...er to section 6 20 1 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 241 Analog input display unit switchover 0 0 Displayed in Select the unit of analog input display 20 73 267 79 858 868 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency Analog input selection Terminal 4 input selection Operation mode selection Terminal 4 func tion assignment Terminal 1 func ...

Страница 572: ...ic flux command C16 Pr 919 C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque mag netic flux Terminal 1 bias torque magnetic flux C18 Pr 920 C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque magnetic flux Terminal 1 gain torque magnetic flux 2 Regenerative torque limit C16 Pr 919 C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque mag netic flux Terminal 1 bias torque magnetic flux C18 Pr 920 C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain comm...

Страница 573: ...and speed command C5 Pr 904 C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 126 C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C38 Pr 932 C39 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque mag netic flux Terminal 4 bias torque magnetic flux C40 Pr 933 C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque magneti...

Страница 574: ...r the torque command voltage set with Pr 73 Analog input selection initial value is 150 Parameter C19 Pr 920 sets the gain for the input signal on terminal 1 i e the maximum value of the analog signal connected to terminal 1 When signals exceed this value the frequency set point value is limited to the value stored in C18 Set the bias torque of terminal 4 input in C38 Pr 932 It is factory set to t...

Страница 575: ...djust torque only without adjustment of voltage current Refer to page 6 399 I001615E Fig 6 191 Signal adjustment of terminal 1 I001616E Fig 6 192 Signal adjustment of terminal 4 NOTE When voltage current input specifications were switched using Pr 73 and Pr 267 perform calibration without fail Torque setting signal Torque 0 0 0 C17 Pr 919 150 100 5 V 10 V C19 Pr 920 Gain C18 Pr 920 Initial value 4...

Страница 576: ... Note that the LEDs V or A also light up as an additional indicator when Pr 241 is set to 1 and the display is set to the settings for C16 to C19 resp C38 to C41 Analog Command terminal 1 4 according to Pr 73 Pr 267 Pr 241 0 initial value Pr 241 1 0 to 5V input 0 to 5V 0 to 100 0 1 is displayed 0 to 100 0 to 5V 0 01V is displayed 0 to 10V input 0 to 10V 0 to 100 0 1 is displayed 0 to 100 0 to 10V ...

Страница 577: ... mode Turn the digital dial until C appears Press the SET key to display C Turn the digital dial until C 1 9 C 4 1 appears Set to C19 Terminal 1 gain torque Press the SET key to display the analog voltage current value Apply the maximum set value Turn the external potentiometer to its maximum CAUTION After performing the operation in step do not touch the digital dial until completion of calibrati...

Страница 578: ... dial until C appears Press the SET key to display C Turn the digital dial until C 1 9 C 4 1 appears Set to C19 Terminal 1 gain torque Press the SET key to display the analog voltage current value Turn the digital dial to set the gain voltage 0V 0mA equals to 0 10V 5V 20mA to 100 NOTE The current setting at the instant of turning is displayed Press SET to set Operation Display The parameter number...

Страница 579: ...394 b CAUTION Take care when setting any value other than 0 as the bias torque at 0V 0mA Torque is applied to the motor by merely tuning on the start signal without torque command Turn the digital dial until C 18 Pr 920 or C 40 Pr 933 appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value 150 Turn the digital dial to change the set value to 130 0 130 Press SET to set Press the MODE key twice to...

Страница 580: ...ut ter minal function selection and assign functions to the output terminal Since turning off the start command clears the retained frequency the inverter does not operate at the retained frequency even if restarted When Pr 573 1 input decrease is detected LF signal output even if the analog input value to bias frequency of terminal 2 or terminal 4 is set to 2mA or less using C2 Pr 902 or C5 Pr 90...

Страница 581: ...E When terminal assignment is changed using Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection the other functions may be affected Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal Output frequency Analog input Operation continue Input current decrease LF signal Time Return Output frequency Set point fixed Operation continue Input current decrease Return LF signal Time Measured v...

Страница 582: ...ing decrease in input cur rent retained frequency was not cleared and operation continues 6 17 1 Added compensation override function Operation of added compensation terminal 1 and override compensation terminal 2 are invalid during decrease in input current 6 20 3 Input filter time constant The value before filtering is detected When input current decreases fre quency after filtering average valu...

Страница 583: ...ed Stop from PU Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection Pr 75 6 21 1 Prevention of parameter rewrite Parameter write selection Pr 77 6 21 2 Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor Reverse rotation prevention selection Pr 78 6 21 3 Display necessary parameters Reverse rotation prevention selection Pr 160 Pr 172 to Pr 174 6 21 4 Control of parameter write by communication EEP...

Страница 584: ...t put is shut off 17 Enabled only when the protective function is activated 100 Reset input always enabled If the PU is discon nected operation will be continued Pressing the STOP key deceler ates the motor to a stop only in the PU operation mode Function 101 Enabled only when the protective function is activated 102 Reset input always enabled When the PU is discon nected the inverter out put is s...

Страница 585: ...an alarm is not output An alarm output is not provided When Pr 75 is set to any of 0 to 3 100 to 103 deceleration to a stop by the STOP key is valid only in the PU operation mode NOTES When the PU has been disconnected since before power on it is not judged as an alarm To make a restart confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter The motor decelerates to a stop when the PU is disc...

Страница 586: ... signal Press the EXT key The message PS is canceled Turn on the STF or STR signal The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal I000027C Fig 6 199 Stop during external operation NOTE If Pr 250 Stop selection is set to other than 9999 to select coasting to a stop the motor will not be coasted to a stop but decelerated to a stop by the PU stop function during...

Страница 587: ... can set Pr 75 to disable reset operation until the thermal cumulative amount reaches 0 when a thermal trip THM THT or an over current trip OC1 to OC3 occurs consecutively twice When Pr 75 100 to 103 114 to 117 reset limit is made valid NOTE When the power on reset no control power is supplied is made the thermal cumulative amount is cleared ...

Страница 588: ...on can be written during operation in the PU oper ation mode but cannot be written in external operation mode Disable parameter write Pr 77 1 Parameter write is not enabled Reading is enabled Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot be performed either The parameters given below can be written if Pr 77 1 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Secti...

Страница 589: ...stants 95 Rated motor frequency 96 Auto tuning setting status 100 to 109 Adjustable 5 points V f parameter 135 to 139 Parameter for electronic bypass sequence 178 to 196 I O terminal function selection 255 Life alarm status display 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 257 Control circuit capacitor life display 258 Main circuit capacitor life display 291 Pulse train I O selection 292 Autom...

Страница 590: ...rrying over times 564 Operating time carrying over times 570 Multiple rating setting 574 Second motor online auto tuning 800 Control method selection 819 Easy gain tuning selection 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 859 Torque current 860 Second motor torque current 868 Terminal 1 function assignment Parameter Description Tab 6 117 Parameters that cannot be written during operation ...

Страница 591: ...on to only one direction This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel FR DU07 parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 signals STF STR signals via external terminals and the forward and reverse rotation commands through communication Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 78 Reverse rotation preve...

Страница 592: ... be displayed 172 User group registered display batch clear 0 0 16 Displays the number of cases registered as a user group Read only 9999 Batch clear the user group registration 173 User group registration 9999 0 999 9999 Set the parameter numbers to be registered to the user group 174 User group clear 9999 0 999 9999 Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from the user group NOTES When a plug in...

Страница 593: ...atch delete the reg istered parameters set Pr 172 to 9999 Registration of parameter to user group Pr 173 I001199E Fig 6 200 When registering Pr 3 to user group Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation mode indication The inverter must be at a stop The inverter must be in the PU operation mode using the PU EXT key Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial...

Страница 594: ...o Pr 172 no function is available Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation mode indication The inverter must be at a stop The inverter must be in the PU operation mode using the PU EXT key Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until P 174 appears Press the SET key to display 9999 Turn the digital dial until 3 appears Press the SET key to set P 174 an...

Страница 595: ... mode at power on 15 4 6 24 27 232 239 75 161 178 189 190 196 340 550 Jog frequency Multi speed operation Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection Frequency setting key lock operation selection Input terminal func tion selection Output terminal function selection Communication start up mode selection NET mode opera tion command source selection 6 10 2 6 10 1 6 21 1 6 26 2 6 14 1...

Страница 596: ...hen using the RS 485 terminals or communication option The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code I001696E Fig 6 202 Operation modes of the inverter NOTES Either 3 or 4 may be set to select the PU external combined operation and these settings differ in starting method In the initial setting the stop function by of the PU FR DU07 PU stop ...

Страница 597: ... 423 PU external operation switch over signal X16 refer to page 6 424 PU NET operation switchover signal X65 refer to page 6 425 External NET operation switchover signal X66 refer to page 6 425 Pr 340 Communication start up mode selection refer to page 6 427 External operation Switching from the network Switching from the PU Network operation PU operation Switch to the external operation mode from...

Страница 598: ...ernal Terminal 2 4 JOG multi speed etc Terminal 2 4 5 analog RL RM RH JOG PC etc Pr 79 4 External PU combined operation 2 Frequency setting terminal ON FWD REV key ON From PU Pr 79 1 Fixed to PU operation Digital dial From communication RS 485 terminals communication option From communication RS 485 terminals communication option RS 485 terminals or communication option RS 485 terminal Where is th...

Страница 599: ...f you don t need to change the parameter settings frequently you can set the unit to external mode permanently by setting Pr 79 to 2 If you need to change parameter settings frequently external mode should be activated by setting Pr 79 to 0 Then the frequency inverter will switch to external mode automatically when the power is switched on but it can be switched to PU mode by pressing the PU EXT k...

Страница 600: ...he terminal used for the PU signal output assign the function by setting 10 source logic or 110 sink logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection PU external combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 Select the PU external combined operation mode 1 when making frequency setting from the operation panel FR DU07 digital dial or parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 and inputting the start co...

Страница 601: ... frequency setting from the external potentiometer multi speed or JOG signal and inputting the start command by key oper ation of the operation panel FR DU07 or parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 Select 4 for Pr 79 You cannot change to the other operation mode by using the PU EXT key Fig 6 208 Combined operation mode 2 I001208E Motor Power supply Inverter Frequency setting potentiometer ...

Страница 602: ...ation direction is determined by the input signal of the external operation The set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal PU operation NET operation Send the mode change command to network operation mode through communication Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU oper ation NET operation external operation Command to change to external mode is ...

Страница 603: ... selection depending on the corre sponding parameter write condition Refer to Tab 6 1 for the parameter list OFF Forcibly switched to external operation mode External operation allowed Switching to PU or NET operation mode disa bled Parameter write disabled with exception of Pr 79 Tab 6 119 Function of the X12 signal Operation Condition X12 MRS Signal Opera tion Mode Operating Status Switching to ...

Страница 604: ... Fixed to PU operation mode 2 External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode Can be switched to NET operation mode 3 4 External PU combined operation mode External PU combined mode fixed 6 External operation mode PU operation mode Can be switched to external PU or NET operation mode with operation continued 7 X12 MRS ON External operation mode PU operation mode Can be switched to externa...

Страница 605: ...s on or to network operation mode when the X65 signal turns off NET operation mode when the X66 signal is on PU operation mode when the X16 signal is off PU operation mode also when Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 1 communication option control source and the communication option is not fitted External operation mode when the X16 signal is on Pr 340 Pr 79 X65 Signal State Remark...

Страница 606: ...he X65 signal has been assigned the operation mode changes with the ON OFF state of the X65 signal Pr 340 Pr 79 X66 Signal Remarks ON PU OFF NET 0 initial value 1 2 0 initial value NET operation mode External operation mode 1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode 2 NET operation mode External operation mode Cannot be switched to PU operation mode 3 4 External PU combined operation mode Exte...

Страница 607: ...unication option is connected Refer to section 6 21 4 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 79 Operation mode selection 0 0 4 6 7 Select the operation mode Refer to page 6 418 57 79 Restart coasting time Operation mode selection 6 16 1 6 22 1 340 Communication start up mode selection 0 0 As set in Pr 79 1 2 Started in network operation mode When...

Страница 608: ... mode 1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode 2 External operation mode Can be switched to external or NET opera tion mode Switching to PU operation mode disabled 3 4 External PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching disabled 6 External operation mode Can be switched to external PU or NET operation mode with operation continued 7 X12 MRS signal ON External operation mode Can be s...

Страница 609: ...28 59 79 Multi speed input compensation selection Remote function selection Operation mode selection 6 10 3 6 10 4 6 22 1 1 Operation command source external 339 Communication speed command source 0 0 Speed command source communication 1 Speed command source external Fre quency setting from communication is invalid terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is valid 2 Speed command source external Fre...

Страница 610: ...551 1 PU mode RS 485 terminals When the communication option is not fitted therefore the operation mode cannot be switched to network operation mode Changed setting value is made valid when powering on or resetting the inverter Pr 550 Pr 551 Operation Mode of Control Source Remarks PU connector USB connector RS 485 terminals Communication option 0 1 PU operation mode NET operation mode 2 initial v...

Страница 611: ...ector or operation from the USB connector 2 PU connector or 3 USB connector Run command start stop Running frequency setting Monitor Parameter write Parameter read Inverter reset Except for 2 3 Run command start stop Running frequency setting Monitor Parameter write Parameter read Inverter reset Control by communication from inverter RS 485 terminals 1 RS 485 terminal Run command start stop Runnin...

Страница 612: ...e parameter list Parameter clear is disabled When Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 1 RS 485 terminals valid or Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 and the communication option is not fitted When Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 0 communication option valid or Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 and the communication option...

Страница 613: ...tion valid or Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 and the communication option is fitted Alarm Definition Condition Pr 551 setting Operation Mode PU operation External operation External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 2 Pr 79 4 NET operation when RS 485 terminals are used NET operation when communica tion option is used Inverter fault S...

Страница 614: ...ulti speeds Pr 59 1 2 remote Pr 270 1 3 stop on contact 1 RM Middle speed operation command remote setting deceleration NET External NET External 2 RH High speed operation command remote setting acceleration NET External NET External 3 RT Second function selection NET External Pr 270 1 3 stop on contact 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Combined Combined 5 JOG Jog operation selection External 6 CS S...

Страница 615: ...itation 24 MRS Output stop Combined External Pr 79 7 PU operation interlock External Pr 79 7 When X12 signal is not assigned 25 STOP Start self holding selection External 26 MC Control mode swichover NET External 27 TL Torque limit selection 28 X28 Start time tuning start exter nal input 37 X37 Traverse function selection 42 X42 Torque bias selection 1 43 X43 Torque bias selection 2 44 X44 P PI co...

Страница 616: ...command source and speed command source are external X67 Signal State Operation Command Source Speed Command Source No signal assignment According to Pr 338 According to Pr 339 ON OFF Operation is valid only from external terminal signal Tab 6 129 Switching of command source by the signal X67 NOTES The ON OFF state of the X67 signal is reflected only during a stop It is reflected after a stop when...

Страница 617: ... Pr 334 Pr 343 Pr 549 6 23 6 Restrictions on parameter write through communication Communication EEPROM write selection Pr 342 6 23 4 Operation by PLC function PLC function Pr 414 Pr 417 Pr 498 Pr 506 Pr 515 6 23 7 Communication using USB FR Configurator USB communication Pr 547 Pr 548 6 23 8 Abb 6 209 PU connector pin outs I001209E Pin Number Name Description 1 SG Earth Ground connected to termin...

Страница 618: ...Fig 6 211 Connecting the RS 485 interface of a PC to the PU connector I001211E Fig 6 212 Connecting the RS 232C interface of a PC to the PU connector I001212E Operation panel connector FR ADP FR DU07 Inverter PU connector FR A5CBL RJ 45 connector RJ 45 connector Inverter PU connector Cable as shown in Fig 6 213 RS 485 interface RJ 45 connector Station 0 PC Inverter PU connector SC FR PC RS 232C Ca...

Страница 619: ...ct the RS232C RS485 converter to the RS232C port of the computer Note that this cable can only be used for connection of a frequency inverter If you need to connect multiple frequency inverters to one another in series use the second serial interface screw terminals Computer side terminals PU connector RS 485 block Cable connection and signal direction Receive data Receive data Send data Send data...

Страница 620: ...eceive for connection of further stations SDA1 TXD1 Inverter send SDB1 TXD1 Inverter send SDA2 TXD2 Inverter send for connection of further stations SDB2 TXD2 Inverter send for connection of further stations PS5 VCC 5V power supply permissible load current 100mA SG GND Earth connected to terminal SD Tab 6 131 RS 485 terminal description Terminating resistor switch Factory set to OPEN Set only the ...

Страница 621: ...erminal screw and insert the stripped cable into the terminal Fig 6 215 Preparing the cable I001326E Item Description Screws size M2 Tightening torque 0 22Nm 0 25Nm Cable size 0 3mm 0 75mm Screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver Tip dimensions 0 4mm 2 5mm Tab 6 132 Connection to the RS 485 terminals b CAUTION Under tightening can cause cable disconnection or malfunction Over tightening can cause ...

Страница 622: ...ition I001214E Fig 6 216 Connection of a computer to one inverter I001215E Fig 6 217 Connection of a computer to several inverters RS 485 interface PC Inverter Twisted pair cable RS 485 terminal RS 232C cable PC Inverter Twisted pair cable RS 485 terminal Maximum 15m Converter RS 485 interface PC Station 0 Twisted pair cable RS 485 terminal RS 485 terminal RS 485 terminal Station 1 Station n RS 23...

Страница 623: ...bers of the computer since they change with the model Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the 100 Ω position Fig 6 218 Connection to one inverter I001216E I001217E Fig 6 219 Connection to several inverter NOTE For branching connect the wires as shown below PC PC Station 0 Station 1 Station n To computer send To computer receive To computer ground To receiving termi...

Страница 624: ...485 terminal to enable 2 wire type connection with the inverter Fig 6 220 2 wire type connection I001219E NOTE Create a program so that transmission is disabled receiving state when the computer is not sending and reception is disabled sending state during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data Transmission enable Reception enable Pass a wire Computer Inverter ...

Страница 625: ...sonal computer 118 PU communication speed 192 48 96 192 384 Set the communication speed The setting value 100 equals the communication speed For example the communication speed is 19200bps when the setting value is 192 119 PU communication stop bit length 1 Stop bit length Data length 0 1bit 8bit 1 2bit 10 1bit 7bit 11 2bit 120 PU communication parity check 2 0 Without parity check 1 With odd pari...

Страница 626: ...36 RS 485 communication check time interval 0 s 0 RS 485 communication can be made but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode 0 1 999 8s Set the interval of communication check time same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No communication check 337 RS 485 communication waiting time setting 9999 0 150ms 9999 Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and re...

Страница 627: ... setting unchanged from 0 initial value EEPROM write The above parameter can be set any time when the communication option is connected Refer to section 6 21 4 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 342 Communication EEPROM write selection 0 0 Parameter values written by communica tion are written to the EEPROM and RAM 1 Parameter values written ...

Страница 628: ...ns Pr 117 Pr 331 Communication speed PU connector Selected from among 4800 9600 19200 and 38400bps Pr 118 RS 485 terminal Can be selected from 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400bps Pr 332 Control protocol Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex system Communication specifications Character system ASCII 7 bits or 8 bits can be selected Pr 119 Pr 333 Start bit 1 bit Stop bit le...

Страница 629: ...plained in the next section In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter 10ms or more is also required after no data error ACK Refer to page 6 453 The inverter response to the inverter reset request can be selected Refer to page 6 459 Tab 6 139 I000030C Fig 6 221 Schematic diagram of data exchange No Operation Run Com mand Running Fre quency Parame ter Write Inverter Reset M...

Страница 630: ...verter according to the computer Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 or Pr 341 CR LF presence absence selection Format Number of Characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 A Data write ENQ Inverter station number Instruction code Waiting time Data Sum check A Data write ENQ Inverter station number Instruction code Waiting time Data Sum check B Data read...

Страница 631: ...the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments e g 1 10ms 2 20ms Signal Name ASCII Code Description STX H02 Start Of Text start of data ETX H03 End Of Text end of data ENQ H05 Enquiry communication request ACK H06 Acknowledge no data error detec...

Страница 632: ...a format The number of characters decreases by 1 I000039C Fig 6 223 Sum check code examples H05 H02 H30 H30 H30 H31 H41 H37 H45 H46 H33 H31 H31 H37 H37 H44 H30 H31 H34 H30 H31 H03 0 0 E F 3 1 1 1 4 0 1 0 1 7 7 A 7 D 0 H H H H H H H H H 30 31 45 31 31 30 37 41 44 H F 4 H H H H H H 30 31 31 37 37 30 H 30 Example 1 Computer Inverter Example 2 Inverter Computer Binary code Binary code ASCII Code ASCII...

Страница 633: ... data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake Alternatively data receive is not completed within the predetermined time CR or LF is not as set in the parameter H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting H5 Overrun error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data H6 H7 Character error The character received...

Страница 634: ...heck Yes 1 bit No 0 bits Tab 6 137 Communication specifications NOTES In addition to the above 1 start bit is necessary Minimum number of total bits 9 bits Maximum number of total bits 12 bits Function Data Check Time Various monitors run command frequency setting RAM 12ms Parameter read write frequency setting EEPROM 30ms Parameter clear all clear 5s Reset command no answer Tab 6 138 Data check t...

Страница 635: ... a minor fault output signal LF is output For the terminal used for the LF signal output assign the func tion by setting 98 source logic or 198 sink logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection 쑶 Example 쑴 PU connector communication with different settings of paramter 121 I001354E Fig 6 225 Data transmission error Computer Data flow Inverter Inverter Data flow Computer Wrong...

Страница 636: ...ication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source PU operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or network operation mode for RS 485 terminal communication When the setting is 9999 communication check disconnection detection is not made When the setting is 0 communication from the PU connector cannot be performed For com...

Страница 637: ...8 Fig 6 228 General flow Line number 10 OPEN COM1 9600 E 8 2 HD AS 1 20 COMST1 1 1 COMST1 2 1 30 ON COM 1 GOSUB REC 40 COM 1 ON 50 D 01FB10002 60 S 0 70 FOR I 1 TO LEN D 80 A MID D I 1 90 A ASC A 100 S S A 110 NEXT I 120 D CHR H5 D RIGHT HEX S 2 130 PRINT 1 D 140 GOTO 50 1000 REC 1010 IF LOC 1 0 THEN RETURN 1020 PRINT RECEIVE DATA 1030 PRINT INPUT LOC 1 1 1040 RETURN Initial setting of I O file Co...

Страница 638: ...ication request If communication is disabled during operation due to sig nal cable breakage etc the inverter cannot be stopped When the communication check time interval has elapsed the inverter will come to an alarm stop E PUE E SER The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage computer fault ...

Страница 639: ...ead H71 H0000 to HFFFF Output voltage hexadecimal in 0 1V increments 4 B E D Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3 4 B E D Special monitor selection No Read H73 H01 to H36 Monitor selection data Refer to Tab 6 142 on page 6 463 2 B E D Write HF3 2 A C D Alarm definition Read H74 to H77 H0000 to HFFFF Refer to Tab 6 143 on page 6 464 4 B E D 3 Run com...

Страница 640: ...computer the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer 4 A C D H9666 Resets the inverter When data is sent normally ACK is returned to the computer and then the inverter is reset 4 A D 7 Alarm definition all clear Write HF4 H9696 Alarm history batch clear 4 A C D 8 All parameter clear Write HFC All parameters return to the initial values Any of four different all clear operations are pe...

Страница 641: ...minal The gain frequency can also be written using Pr 125 instruction code H99 or Pr 126 instruction code H9A 2 B E D Write HEC 2 A C D Tab 6 139 Setting of the instruction codes and data 3 NOTES Refer to page 6 450 for data formats A A B B C und D Set 65520 HFFF0 as a parameter value 8888 and 65535 HFFFF as 9999 For the instruction codes HFF HEC and HF3 their values are held once written but clea...

Страница 642: ...1 C16 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque magnetic flux 13 93 9 C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 C17 919 Terminal 1 bias torque magnetic flux 13 93 9 126 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 C18 920 Terminal 1 gain command tor que magnetic flux 14 94 9 C7 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1 C19 920 Terminal 1 gain torque magnetic flux 14 94 9 C8 930 Curr...

Страница 643: ...ting 0 01Hz H18 Motor load factor 0 1 H06 Running speed 1r min H19 Cumulative power 1kWh H07 Motor torque 0 1 H20 Torque command 0 1 H08 Converter output voltage 0 1V H21 Torque current command 0 1 H09 Regenerative brake duty 0 1 H22 Motor output 0 01kW 0 1kW H0A Electronic thermal relay function load factor 0 1 H23 Feedback pulse H0B Output current peak value 0 01A 0 1A H32 Power saving effect Va...

Страница 644: ...D9 E MB5 H22 E OV3 HB3 E PE2 HDA E MB6 H30 E THT HC0 E CPU HDB E MB7 H31 E THM HC1 E CTE HDC E EP H40 E FIN HC2 E P24 HF1 E 1 H50 E IPF HC4 E CDO HF2 E 2 H51 E UVT HC5 E IOH HF3 E 3 H52 E ILF HC6 E SER HF6 E 6 H60 E OLT HC7 E AIE HF7 E 7 H70 E BE HC8 E USB HFB E 11 H80 E GF HD0 E OS HFD E 13 H81 E LF HD1 E OSD H90 E OHT HD2 E ECT Tab 6 143 Alarm data Example 쑴 Alarm description display example ins...

Страница 645: ...eset can be executed with the instruction code HFD Item Instruction Code Bits Description Example Run command HFA 8 b0 AU current input selection b1 Forward rotation start b2 Reverse rotation start b3 RL low speed b4 RM middle speed b5 RH high speed b6 RT second function selection b7 MRS output stop Run command extended HF9 16 b0 AU current input selection b1 Forward rotation start b2 Reverse rota...

Страница 646: ...e rotation b3 SU up to frequency b4 OL overload b5 IPF instantaneous power failure b6 FU frequency detection b7 ABC1 alarm Inverter status monitor extended H79 16 b0 RUN inverter running b1 Forward rotation b2 Reverse rotation b3 SU up to frequency b4 OL overload b5 IPF instantaneous power failure b6 FU frequency detection b7 ABC1 alarm b8 ABC2 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 Alarm occurrence Tab 6 145...

Страница 647: ...ength 1bit 343 Communication error count 0 Display the number of communica tion errors during Modbus RTU com munication Reading only 539 Modbus RTU communica tion check time interval 9999 0 Modbus RTU communication can be made but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode 0 1 999 8 s Set the interval of communication check time same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No communic...

Страница 648: ...n be selected from 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400bps Pr 332 Control protocol Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex system Communication specifications Character system Binary fixed to 8 bits Start bit 1 bit Stop bit length Select from the following three types 앫 No parity stop bit length 2 bits 앫 Odd parity stop bit length 1 bit 앫 Even parity stop bit length 1 bit Pr 33...

Страница 649: ...ode indicating that the request from the master cannot be executed is added No response is returned for the hardware detected error frame error and CRC check error Broadcast By specifying address 0 the master can send a message to all slaves All slaves that received the message from the master execute the requested function In this communication the slaves do not return a response to the master NO...

Страница 650: ...set function code is other than those in the following table When the slave returns a nor mal response it returns the function code set by the master When the slave returns an error response it returns H80 function code Data field The format changes depending on the function code refer to page 6 471 Data includes the byte count number of bytes description of access to the holding register etc CRC ...

Страница 651: ...ress Set the address to which the message will be sent Broadcast communica tion cannot be made 0 is invalid Function Set H03 Starting Address Set the address at which holding register data read will be started Starting address starting register address decimal 40001 For example setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding register 40002 No of Points Set the number of holding ...

Страница 652: ... 00Hz 쑶 Example 쑴 To read the register values of 41004 Pr 4 to 41006 Pr 6 from the slave address 17 H11 Slave Ad dress Function Starting Address No of Points CRC Check H11 8 bit H03 8 bit H03 8 bit HEB 8 bit H00 8 bit H03 8 bit H77 8 bit H2B 8 bit Slave Ad dress Function Byte Count Data CRC Check H11 8 Bit H03 8 Bit H06 8 Bit H17 8 Bit H70 8 Bit H0B 8 Bit HB8 8 Bit H03 8 Bit HE8 8 Bit H2C 8 Bit HE...

Страница 653: ...H 8 bit L 8 bit L 8 bit H 8 bit Message Description Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication Function Set H06 Register Address Set the address of the holding register to which data will be written Register address holding register address decimal 40001 For example setting of register address 0001 writes data to the holding...

Страница 654: ...8 bit H08 8 bit H00 8 bit H00 8 bit H 8 bit L 8 bit L 8 bit H 8 bit Slave Address Function Subfunction Data CRC Check 8 bit H08 8 bit H00 8 bit H00 8 bit H 8 bit L 8 bit L 8 bit H 8 bit Message Description Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent Broadcast communica tion cannot be made 0 is invalid Function Set H08 Subfunction Set H0000 Data Any data can be set if it is 2 by...

Страница 655: ...ting address starting register address decimal 40001 For example setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding register 40002 No of Points Set the number of holding registers where data will be written The number of registers where data can be written is a maximum of 125 Byte Count The setting range is H02 to HFA 0 to 250 Set twice greater than the value specified at Data Set ...

Страница 656: ... L 8 bit L 8 bit H 8 bit Message Description Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent Broadcast communica tion cannot be made 0 is invalid Function Set H46 Tab 6 154 Description of the query message Message Description Starting Address The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access is returned Starting address starting register address decimal 40001 F...

Страница 657: ...e is sent in the case of broadcast communication also Slave Address Function Exception Code CRC Check 8 bit H80 Function 8 bit 8 bit L 8 bit H 8 bit Message Description Slave address Set the address received from the master Function The master requested function code H80 is set Exception code The code in the following table is set Tab 6 156 Description of response data Code Error Item Description ...

Страница 658: ...h is checked and the received data length of less than 4 bytes is regarded as an error CRC check error A mismatch found by CRC check between the message frame data and calculation result is regarded as an error Tab 6 158 Error check item Parameters Setting Range Minimum Setting Range Initial Value 343 Read only 1 0 Tab 6 159 Number of communication errors NOTE The number of communication errors is...

Страница 659: ...Any value can be written 40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A as a written value 40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA as a written value 40006 Parameter clear Write Set H5A96 as a written value 40007 All parameter clear Write Set HAA99 as a written value 40009 Inverter status control input instruction Read write Refer to Tab 6 161 40010 Operation mode inverter setting Read write Refer to Tab...

Страница 660: ...Control input instruction Inverter status 0 Stop command RUN inverter running 1 Forward rotation command Forward rotation 2 Reverse rotation command Reverse rotation 3 RH high speed operation command SU up to frequency 4 RM middle speed operation command OL overload 5 RL low speed operation command IPF instantaneous power failure 6 JOG Jog operation FU frequency detection 7 RT second function sele...

Страница 661: ...ng 0 01Hz 40224 Motor load factor 0 1 40206 Running speed 1U min 40225 Cumulative power 1kWh 40207 40226 Torque command 0 1 40208 Converter output voltage 0 1V 40227 Torque current com mand 0 1 40209 Regenerative brake duty 0 1 40228 Motor output 0 01kW 0 1kW 40210 Electronic thermal relay function load factor 0 1 40229 Feedback pulse 40211 Output current peak value 0 01A 0 1A 40250 Power saving e...

Страница 662: ...ead 43904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias terminal analog value Read The analog value of the current voltage applied to the terminal 4 is read 126 905 41905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Read write C7 905 42095 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain analog value Read write The analog value set to C7 905 is read 43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain terminal analog value Read The analo...

Страница 663: ...que magnetic flux terminal analog value Read Analog value of the voltage applied to terminal 1 is read C38 932 41932 Terminal 4 bias command torque magnetic flux Read write C39 932 42122 Terminal 4 bias torque magnetic flux Read write Analog value set in C39 932 is read 43932 Terminal 4 bias torque magnetic flux terminal analog value Read Analog value of the cur rent voltage applied to termi nal 4...

Страница 664: ...ory 7 Read 40508 Alarm history 8 Read Tab 6 165 Alarm history Data Description Data Description Data Description H00 No alarm H91 E PTC HD3 E OD H10 E OC1 HA0 E OPT HD5 E MB1 H11 E OC2 HA3 E OP3 HD6 E MB2 H12 E OC3 HB0 E PE HD7 E MB3 H20 E OV1 HB1 E PUE HD8 E MB4 H21 E OV2 HB2 E RET HD9 E MB5 H22 E OV3 HB3 E PE2 HDA E MB6 H30 E THT HC0 E CPU HDB E MB7 H31 E THM HC1 E CTE HDC E EP H40 E FIN HC2 E P...

Страница 665: ... station number setting of the data sent from the master Communication check is started from the first communication after switching to the network ope ration mode use Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection to change Communication check time of query communication includes data absence time 3 5 byte Since this data absence time differs according to the communication speed make setting c...

Страница 666: ...rt signal is made valid only when the sequence program execution key is set to RUN When the sequence program execution key is in the STOP position the inverter does not start if the inverter start signal STF or STR is turned on If the key is switched from RUN to STOP during inverter opera tion the inverter is decelerated to a stop 416 Pre scale function selection 0 0 to 5 Pre scale function select...

Страница 667: ...ication 551 PU mode operation command source selection 6 22 3 548 USB communication check time interval 9999 0 USB communication is enabled How ever the inverter will come to an alarm stop E USB if operation is changed to PU operation mode 0 1 to 999 8s Sets the interval of communication check time If a no communication state persists for longer than the permissible time the inverter will come to ...

Страница 668: ...en the inverter opera tion and commercial power supply operation to operate Commercial power supply inverter switchover function Pr 135 Pr 139 Pr 159 6 24 2 Increase speed when the load is light Load torque high speed frequency control Pr 4 Pr 5 Pr 270 Pr 274 6 24 3 Frequency control appropriate for the load torque Droop control Pr 286 Pr 288 6 24 4 Frequency setting by pulse train input Pulse tra...

Страница 669: ...put PLC function 71 PID forward action 80 PID reverse action Measured value set point input PLC function 81 PID forward action 90 PID reverse action Deviation value signal input PLC function Not reflected to the inverter frequency 91 PID forward action 100 PID reverse action Measured value set point input PLC function Not reflected to the inverter frequency 101 PID forward action 129 PID proportio...

Страница 670: ...point for PID control 9999 Terminal 2 input is the set point 134 PID differential time 9999 0 01 10 00s For deviation lamp input time Td required for providing only the manipu lated variable for the proportional P action As the differential time increases greater response is made to a deviation change 9999 No differential control 575 Output interruption detection time 1s 0 3600s The inverter stops...

Страница 671: ... stepped changes of measured value I000045C Kp 1 Td S 1 Ti S Set point Deviation signal Kp Proportionality constant Ti Integral time S Operator Td Differential time Motor Manipulated variable Terminal 1 0 10V DC 0 5V DC Feedback signal measured value PID operation Inverter external controller component Kp 1 Td S 1 Ti S Pr 133 or terminal 2 Kp Proportionality constant Ti Integral time S Operator Td...

Страница 672: ...eristic PID action The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control Fig 6 238 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I000046C Fig 6 239 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I001233E Deviation Set point Measured value P action D action PD action Deviation Set point Measured value P action I action PID action...

Страница 673: ...decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable output frequency I000047C Fig 6 240 Heater I000048C Fig 6 241 Cooling Deviation Positive Negative Reverse action Forward action Tab 6 168 Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable X 0 X 0 t Set point Deviation Feedback signal measured value Set point Measured value Co...

Страница 674: ...depending on the Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal selection setting I001328C Fig 6 242 Connection diagram in source logic M 0 24V STR STF FU OL IPF SE RT X14 PC L1 U L2 V L3 W 4 5 1 10 2 P SU Power supply Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection Setting Potentiometer 1kΩ 1 2W Set point setting Measured value 4 20 mA Pump 2 wire type Detector During PID action PID Upper limit FUP Low...

Страница 675: ...can be selected for PID reverse action Pr 128 10 20 and reverse action for forward action Pr 128 11 21 Set 64 to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 2 2 Set point input Enter the set point for PID control Pr 128 20 21 Pr 133 9999 0 to 5 V 0 to 100 Pr 73 1 3 5 11 13 15 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 Pr 73 0 2 4 10 12 14 4 to 20mA0 0 to 100 Pr 73 6 7 PU Set point input Set the set value Pr 133 from the operation panel or p...

Страница 676: ...utput when the measured value signal falls below the lower limit Pr 132 Pr 128 20 21 60 61 Pr 132 9999 Set 14 or 114 to any of Pr 190 Pr 196 RL Forward reverse rota tion direction output Hi is output to indicate that the output indication of the parameter unit is forward rotation FWD or Low to indicate that it is reverse rotation REV or stop STOP Set 15 or 115 to any of Pr 190 Pr 196 PID During PI...

Страница 677: ...76 Output interruption detection level setting for longer than the time set in Pr 575 Output interruption detection time This function can reduce energy consumption in the low efficiency low speed range When the deviation set value measured value reaches the PID output shutoff cancel level Pr 577 setting 1000 while the PID output interruption function is on the PID output inter ruption function is...

Страница 678: ... function selection Adjustment procedure Parameter Monitor Description Minimum Increment Terminal CA AM Full Scale Remarks 52 PID set point 0 1 100 For using an external PID controller Pr 128 10 11 the monitor value is always displayed as 0 53 PID measurement value 0 1 100 54 PID deviation value 0 1 Value cannot be output from the terminals AM and CA The PID deviation value of 0 is displayed as 10...

Страница 679: ... across terminals 2 5 according to the set value When the set point is 50 As the terminal 2 specifications are 0 0V and 100 5V input 2 5V to the terminal 2 for the set point of 50 Operation To stabilize the measured value change the proportional band Pr 129 to a larger value the integral time Pr 130 to a slightly longer time When performing operation first set the proportional band Pr 129 to a sli...

Страница 680: ...tion of 100 e g 50Hz In C4 Pr 903 set the voltage value at 100 Process value input calibration Apply the output current of 0 detector setting e g 4mA across terminals 4 5 Make calibration of the process value bias using C6 Pr 904 Apply the output current of 100 detector setting e g 20mA across terminals 4 5 Make calibration of the process value gain using C7 Pr 905 NOTE The frequency set in C5 Pr ...

Страница 681: ...ded to the set value across terminals 2 5 When using terminal 4 measured value input and terminal 1 deviation input under PID control set 0 initial value in Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment and 0 initial value in Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment Changing the terminal function using any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Pr 190 to Pr 196 may affect the other functions Please make setting after confirmin...

Страница 682: ...3 to 0 5s or so than the time from when the ON signal enters MC3 until it actu ally turns on 138 Commercial power supply operation switchover selection at an alarm 0 0 Inverter output is stopped motor coast at inverter fault 1 Operation is automatically switched to the commercial power supply opera tion at inverter fault Not switched when an external thermal error occurs 139 Automatic switchover f...

Страница 683: ... supply circuit To switch between inverter operation and bypass operation an interlock must be provided to stop the motor once and then start it by the inverter in order to prevent the inverter from resulting in an overcurrent alarm Using the electronic bypass sequence function that outputs the timing signal for operation of the magnetic contactor a complicated commercial power supply switch over ...

Страница 684: ...output RUN SU IPF OL FU 24V DC 0 1A Inverter relay output A1 C1 B1 C1 A2 B2 B2 C2 Relay output option FR A7AR 230V AC 0 3A 30V DC 0 3A Tab 6 171 Output terminal capacity NOTES Use the commercial power supply switchover function in external operation mode Be sure to connect the other power supply since the function is not performed normally unless the connection terminals R1 L11 S1 L21 are not conn...

Страница 685: ...F OFF Can be selected using Pr 138 always OFF when external thermal relay is on MC3 Between inverter output and motor OFF ON OFF Tab 6 172 Operations of magnetic contactors Signal Terminal Used Function ON OFF MC Operation MC1 MC2 MC3 MRS MRS Operation enable disa ble selection ON Commercial inverter operation enabled ON OFF Commercial inverter operation disabled ON OFF No change CS CS Inverter co...

Страница 686: ...put side MC MC3 MC for commercial power supply operation MC2 Each timer Off only at inverter alarm Operating status motor speed ON Operation enabled OFF Operation disabled ON Forward rotation OFF Stop ON Inverter operation OFF Commercial power supply operation Delay time until the MC turns on off Pr 136 MC switchover interlock time Pr 137 MC3 start waiting time Pr 57 Reset time Pr 58 Switchover cu...

Страница 687: ...this parameter when commercial power supply operation is switched to inverter operation Start inverter operation The switchover to commercial power supply operation is performed by a command or when the switchover frequency is reached When the Stop command is applied the system switches to inverter operation and the motor is decelerated under control I001241E Fig 6 251 Signal timing when there is ...

Страница 688: ...CS signals are on and the STF STR signal is off MC3 is on but when the motor was coasted to a stop from commercial power supply operation last time a start is made after the time set to Pr 137 has elapsed Inverter operation can be performed when the MRS STF STR and CS signals turn on In any other case MRS signal ON commercial power supply operation is performed When the CS signal is turned off the...

Страница 689: ...func tion selection 6 10 1 6 10 4 6 22 1 6 24 1 6 14 1 5 Multi speed setting middle speed 30 Hz 0 400 Hz Set the lower speed frequency 270 Stop on contact load tor que high speed frequency control selection 0 0 Normal operation 1 Stop on control refer to section 6 13 4 2 Load torque high speed fre quency control 3 Stop on contact refer to sec tion 6 13 4 load torque high speed frequency control 27...

Страница 690: ...nt during the time to accelerate from 1 2 of the frequency set in Pr 5 Multi speed setting middle speed to the frequency set in Pr 5 Set 19 in Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection and assign the X19 signal function to the input terminal This function cab made valid only in the external operation mode This control can be activated at every start I001624E Fig 6 254 Connection diagram s...

Страница 691: ...ange is small deceleration time becomes longer as the running frequency increases The maximum output frequency is 120Hz The output frequency is 120Hz even when the setting is above 120Hz The fast response current limit function is made invalid When the average current during acceleration is too small it may be judged as regeneration and the maximum frequency becomes the setting of Pr 5 Changing th...

Страница 692: ...Parameters referred to Refer to Section 286 Droop gain 0 0 Droop control is invalid Normal operation 1 Maximum frequency PID control 6 8 1 0 1 100 Droop control is valid Drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated motor fre quency 287 Droop filter time constant 0 3s 0 1s Time constant of the filter applied on the torque current 288 Droop function activation select...

Страница 693: ...tion Note that the frequency command is limited at 0Hz when the frequency command after droop control is negative When Pr 288 10 droop compensation amount is determined using the motor speed as reference 1 11 Droop control is always exercised during operation Note that the frequency command is limited at 0Hz when the frequency command after droop control is negative When Pr 288 11 droop compensati...

Страница 694: ...l and power supply using a pull up or pull down resistance The reference of resistance value to the wiring length is as in the table below Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 291 Pulse train input selection 0 0 Terminal JOG 1 Pulse train input 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 0 0 Pulse train input invalid 1 250 Indicates division scalin...

Страница 695: ...own resistances NOTES When pulse train input is selected a function assigned to terminal JOG using Pr 185 JOG terminal function selection is made invalid When Pr 419 Position command source selection 2 conditional position pulse train command by inverter pulse train input JOG terminal serves as conditional position pulse train terminal regardless of the Pr 291 Item Specifications Available pulse m...

Страница 696: ...nput pulse division scaling factor Maximum of input pulse pulse s Pr 384 400 maximum of 100kpulse s Detectable pulse 11 45 pulse s I001629E Fig 6 259 Adjustment of pulse train input Example 쑴 When you want to operate at 0Hz when pulse train input is zero and operate at 30Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulse s set parameters as below Pr 384 10 maximum input pulse 4000 pulse s Pr 385 0 Hz Pr 386 30 Hz ...

Страница 697: ... 108 110 Set the number of motor poles when performing encoder feed back control under V f control 81 Number of motor pole 6 7 2 285 Overspeed detection frequency Speed deviation excess detection frequency 9999 0 30Hz If detected frequency output frequency Pr 285 during encoder feedback control the inverter alarm E MB1 is pro vided 9999 Overspeed is not detected 359 Encoder rotation direction 1 0 ...

Страница 698: ...ed from the slip amount r min of the rated motor speed rated load If the setting is too large response becomes slow NOTES When 0 10 110 is set in Pr 144 and the inverter is started error E 1 to E 3 occurs When 102 104 106 108 is set in Pr 144 the value subtracting 100 is set as the number of motor poles b CAUTION If the number of motor poles is wrong control at correct speed can not be performed A...

Страница 699: ...peed ratio of 1 to 1 without any mechanical looseness During acceleration deceleration encoder feedback control is not performed to prevent unstable phenomenon such as hunting Encoder feedback control is performed once output frequency has reached within set speed speed feedback range If the following conditions occur during encoder feedback control the inverter operates at the frequency within se...

Страница 700: ...11 3 6 14 1 1 Traverse function is valid only in the external operation mode 2 Traverse function is valid independ ently of operation mode 593 Maximum amplitude amount 10 0 25 Amplitude amount during traverse operation 594 Amplitude compensationamount during deceleration 10 0 50 Compensation amount at the time of amplitude inversion acceleration deceleration 595 Amplitude compensationamount during...

Страница 701: ... frequency accelerates decelerates to f0 according to the normal acceleration deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 If the start command STF or STR is turned off during traverse operation the frequency decelerates to a stop accord ing to the normal deceleration time Pr 8 NOTES When the second function signal RT is on normal Acceleration deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 is the same as second acceleration decelera...

Страница 702: ... motor accele rates decelerates to f0 in normal acceleration deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 After the out put frequency reaches f0 traverse operation is again performed When the value of amplitude inversion compensation amount Pr 594 Pr 595 is too large pattern operation as set is not performed due to over voltage shut off and stall prevention Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 I...

Страница 703: ...es When the bus voltage level is set to low over voltage error will be less apt to occur However the actual decelera tion time increases The set value must be higher than the The initial value differs according to the inverter capacity 01800 or less 02160 or more 884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 0 0 Regeneration avoidance by bus volt age change ratio is invalid 1 5 ...

Страница 704: ...ion status The DC bus voltage of the inverter is normally about 2 times greater than the input voltage when the input voltage is 440V AC the bus voltage is about 622V DC However it varies with the input power supply waveform The Pr 883 setting should be kept higher than the DC bus voltage level Otherwise the regeneration avoidance function is always on While overvoltage stall oL is activated only ...

Страница 705: ...oidance voltage gain setting set a smaller value in Pr 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain When the load inertia of the motor is large decrease the Pr 886 setting Fig 6 263 Limit the output frequency I001260E NOTES When regeneration avoidance operation is performed oL over voltage stall is displayed and the OL signal is output When regeneration avoidance operation is performed stall preventi...

Страница 706: ... operation selection Pr 244 6 25 1 To determine the maintenance time of parts Inverter part life display Pr 255 Pr 259 6 25 2 Maintenance output function Pr 503 Pr 504 6 25 3 Current average value monitor signal Pr 555 Pr 557 6 25 4 Freely available parameter Free parameter Pr 888 Pr 889 6 25 5 Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 244 Cooling f...

Страница 707: ...ed to Refer to Section 255 Life alarm status display 0 0 15 Display whether the control circuit capacitor main circuit capacitor cool ing fan and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not Reading only 190 196 Output terminal function selection 6 14 5 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 100 0 100 Display the deterioration degree of the i...

Страница 708: ...of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr 257 as a life In the operating status the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energizing time and temperature of the inverter s heatsink and is counted down from 100 As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10 Pr 255 bit 0 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal Pr 255 decimal Bits binary Inru...

Страница 709: ...asuring completion is set in Pr 259 read Pr 258 and check the deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor The life of the main circuit capacitor can not be measured in the following conditions The FR HC MT HC FR CV FR BU MT BU5 or BU is connected Terminals R1 L11 S1 L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminal P and N Switch power on again during measuring The motor is not connected ...

Страница 710: ... detected and FN is displayed on the operation panel FR DU07 and parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 As an alarm display Pr 255 bit 2 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal NOTE When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans the life of even one cooling fan is diagnosed ...

Страница 711: ... to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 503 Maintenance timer 0 0 1 9998 Display the cumulative energizing time of the inverter in 100h increments Reading only Writing the setting of 0 clears the cumulative energizing time 190 196 Output terminal function selection 6 14 5 504 Maintenan...

Страница 712: ...g operation in any operation mode even if 0 initial value is set in Pr 77 Parameter write selection I001264E Fig 6 267 Monitoring the maintenance timer and current average value Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 555 Current average time 1s 0 1 1 0s Set the time taken to average the current during start bit out put 1s 190 196 503 57 Output te...

Страница 713: ...t obtaining mask transient state data in Pr 556 I001265E Fig 6 268 Output of the pulse signal Y93 From acceleration to constant speed operation Output frequency Y93 Data output mask time When the speed has changed to constant from acceleration deceleration Y93 signal is not output for Pr 556 time Start pulse Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s fixed Time and output current set in Pr 555 are averaged O...

Страница 714: ...mer After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape the maintenance timer value is output as high pulse shape The output time of the maintenance timer value is obtained from the following calculation Note that the output time range is 2 to 9s and it is 2s when Pr 503 is less than16000h and 9s when it exceeds 72000h Fig 6 269 Signal output time for the current average value I001...

Страница 715: ...93 is output as low pulse shape for 20s without data output under the following condition When the motor is in the acceleration deceleration state on completion of the 1 cycle signal output When 1 cycle signal output was ended during restart operation with the setting of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Pr 57 9999 When automatic restart operation was being performed with automat...

Страница 716: ...s the year and month of introduction or inspection The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if 0 initial value is set in Pr 77 Parameter write selection Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 888 Free parameter 1 9999 0 9999 889 Free parameter 2 9999 0 9999 NOTES The set value is stored in E...

Страница 717: ...PU display language selection Pr 145 6 26 1 Use the setting dial of the operation panel like a volume for frequency setting Key lock of operation panel Operation panel operation selection Pr 161 6 26 2 Control of the parameter unit operation panel buzzer PU buzzer control Pr 990 6 26 3 Adjust the LCD contrast of the parameter unit PU contrast adjustment Pr 991 6 26 4 Pr No Name Initial Value Setti...

Страница 718: ... displayed as simple mode parameters only when a parameter unit FR PU04 or FR PU07 is connected Pr No Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 0 0 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode invalid 1 Setting dial volume mode 10 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode valid These setting ...

Страница 719: ...esetting method When a protective function of the inverter is activated the power output of the inverter is blocked motor is coasting The inverter can not start up again unless an automatic restart has been configured or the inverter is reset Please observe carefully the warnings con tained below in the configuration of an auto matic restart or the execution of a reset If protective functions were...

Страница 720: ...ult FN Fan fault 7 10 Major failures E OC1 Over current shut off during acceleration 7 11 E OC2 Over current cut off during constant speed 7 11 E OC3 Over current shutoff during deceleration or stop 7 12 E OV1 Regenerative over voltage cut off during acceleration 7 12 E OV2 Regenerative over voltage cut off during constant speed 7 12 E OV3 Regenerative over voltage shut off during deceleration or ...

Страница 721: ...ion slot installed option e g communication error 7 17 to E 1 Error of the internal extension slot installed option e g connection or contact fault respec tively 7 17 E PE Parameter storage device alarm 7 17 E PE2 Parameter storage device alarm 7 18 E PUE PU disconnection 7 18 E RET Retry count excess 7 18 E 6 E 7 E CPU CPU error 7 18 E CTE Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 termina...

Страница 722: ...lt 14 will be displayed Operation Panel Indication Name Refer to Page Major failures E IOH Inrush resistor overheat 7 21 E SER Communication error inverter 7 21 E AIE Analog input error 7 21 E USB USB communication error 7 22 E 11 Opposite rotation deceleration error 7 22 E 13 Internal circuit error 7 22 Tab 7 1 List of alarm display 3 ...

Страница 723: ...Check the setting of Pr 77 Parameter write selection Refer to section 6 21 2 2 Check the settings of Pr 31 to 36 frequency jump Refer to section 6 8 2 3 Check the settings of Pr 100 to Pr 109 Adjustable 5 points V F Refer to section 6 9 4 4 Check the connection of the PU and inverter Operation Panel Indication Er2 Name Write error during operation Description When parameter write was performed dur...

Страница 724: ...ation Panel Indication rE2 Name Parameter write error Description 1 You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation 2 An error occurred in the E PROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing Check point Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel FR DU07 lit or flickering Corrective action 1 After stopping operation make parameter copy again Refer to section 4 3 10...

Страница 725: ...ion panel is not disconnected etc dur ing parameter copy read Corrective action 1 Use the same model FR A 700 series for parameter copy and verification 2 Perform parameter copy read again Operation Panel Indication Err Description 1 The RES signal is on 2 The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication contact fault of the connector 3 When the control circuit power R1 L11 S1 L21 and the main...

Страница 726: ...que boost setting is not too large 2 Check that the Pr 7 Acceleration time and Pr 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small 3 Check that the load is not too heavy 4 Are there any failure in peripheral devices 5 Check that the Pr 13 Starting frequency is not too large 앫 Check the motor for use under overload Corrective action 1 Increase or decrease the Pr 0 Torque boost setting 1 by 1 and chec...

Страница 727: ...ration time Pr 8 앫 Check the Pr 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr 70 Special regenerative brake duty values Operation Panel Indication TH FR PU04 FR PU07 TH Name Electronic thermal relay function prealarm Description Appears if the integrating value of the Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay reaches or exceeds 85 of the preset level If it reaches 100 of the Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay ...

Страница 728: ...itial value in Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release Operation Panel Indication SL FR PU04 FR PU07 SL Name Speed limit indication output during speed limit Description Output if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control Check point 앫 Check that the torque command is not larger than required 앫 Check that the speed limit level is not low Corrective action 앫 Decrease the torque command 앫 ...

Страница 729: ...d acceleration time in vertical lift application 2 When E OC1 is always lit at starting disconnect the motor once and start the inverter If E OC1 is still lit contact your sales representative 3 Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur 4 Perform a correct stall prevention operation Refer to section 6 7 4 5 Set base voltage rated voltage of the motor etc in Pr 19 Base ...

Страница 730: ...low acceleration e g during descending acceleration with lifting load Corrective action 앫 Decrease the acceleration time 앫 Use regeneration avoidance function Pr 882 to Pr 886 Refer to section 6 24 8 Operation Panel Indication E OV2 FR PU04 FR PU07 Stedy Spd OV Name Regenerative over voltage shut off during constant speed Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter s internal main circu...

Страница 731: ...es the specified value When running a special motor such as a multi pole motor or multiple motors provide a thermal relay on the inverter output side since such motor s cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function Check point 1 Check the motor for use under overload 2 Check that the setting of Pr 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct refer to section 6 12 2 and check that...

Страница 732: ...6 1 Operation Panel Indication E BE FR PU04 FR PU07 Br Cct Fault Name Brake transistor alarm detection internal circuit error Description This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit e g damaged brake transistors In this case the inverter must be powered off immediately Check point 앫 Reduce the load inertia 앫 Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper ...

Страница 733: ...g initial value is 150 setting and remains for more than 3s Check point 앫 Check the motor for use under overload Refer to section 6 7 4 앫 Check that the Pr 865 Low speed detection and Pr 874 OLT level setting values are correct Check the Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level setting if V F control is exercised Corrective action 앫 Reduce the load weight 앫 Change the Pr 22 Stall prevention operatio...

Страница 734: ...inal function selection Corrective action Reduce the load weight Reduce the load You may also need to connect an additional series resistor between terminals SD and AU Operation Panel Indication E OPT FR PU04 FR PU07 Option Fault Name Option alarm Description 앫 Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R L1 S L2 T L3 accidentally when a high power factor converter is connected ...

Страница 735: ... changed Check point 앫 Check that the plug in option is plugged into the connector securely 1 to 3 indicate the option connector numbers 앫 Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter 앫 Check that the communication option is not fitted to the connector 1 or 2 Corrective action 앫 Connect the plug in option securely 앫 Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess elect...

Страница 736: ...nector This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr 122 PU communication check time interval Check point 앫 Check that the FR DU07 or parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 is fitted tightly 앫 Check the Pr 75 setting Corrective action Fit the FR DU07 or parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 securely Operation Panel Indication E RET FR PU04 FR PU07 Retry ...

Страница 737: ...tion Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly Operation Panel Indication E OS FR PU04 FR PU07 E OS Name Overspeed occurence Description Appears when the motor speed reaches and exceedes the overspeed setting level under encoder feedback control or vector control Check point 앫 Check that the Pr 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct 앫 Check that the number of encoder pulses does...

Страница 738: ...back excee ded the reference under position control Check point 앫 Check that the position detecting encoder mounting orientation matches the parameter 앫 Check that the load is not large 앫 Check that the Pr 427 Excessive level error and Pr 369 Number of encoder pulses are correct Corrective action 앫 Check the parameters 앫 Reduce the load weight 앫 Set the Pr 427 Excessive level error and Pr 369 Numb...

Страница 739: ... measure please contact your sales representative Operation Panel Indication E SER FR PU04 Fault 14 FR PU07 VFD Comm error Name Communication error inverter Description This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than permissible retry count when a value other than 9999 is set in Pr 335 RS 485 communication number of retries during RS 485 communic...

Страница 740: ...ging from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward under real sensorless vector control At this time the inverter output is stopped if the rotation direction will not change causing overload Check point 앫 Check that the Pr 71 Applied motor setting is appropriate 앫 Check that offline auto tuning and online auto tuning have been performed Corrective action 앫 Check the setting of Pr 71 Applied m...

Страница 741: ... page 7 11 for major fault Switch power off once then switch it on again Turn on the reset signal RES for more than 0 1s Connect the terminals RES and SD when using sink logic or terminals RES and PC as shown Fig 7 3 when using source logic If the RES signal is kept on Err appears flickers to indicate that the inverter is in are set status Fig 7 1 Resetting the inverter by using the operation pane...

Страница 742: ... 4 LED display There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel I000299C Fig 7 4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters FR DU07 ...

Страница 743: ...istory Procedure for displaying the alarm list and the status values for the time of the alarm Eight past alarms can be displayed with the digital dial The last alarm in the list is identified by a dot after the E E When no alarm exists E 0 is displayed When no alarm exists is displayed Output frequency Flickering Output current Flickering Flickering Energizing time Flickering Output voltage Flick...

Страница 744: ...ars Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode Turn the digital dial until Er CL appears Press the SET key to show the currently set value The initial value 0 appears Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting value of 1 Press the SET key to set Operation Display The parameter number read previously appears Flicker Alarm history clear complete 앫 By turning the digital dial you ...

Страница 745: ...not OFF with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected Pr 57 9999 Check that the sink or source jumper connector is fitted securely Check that the encoder wiring is correct Check the parameter settings Check that the reverse rotation prevention selection Pr 78 is not selected Check that the operation mode selection Pr 79 setting is correct Check that the bias and gai...

Страница 746: ... dust Check that the load is not too heavy Lighten the load Check that the inverter output voltages U V W balanced Check that the Pr 0 Torque boost setting is correct Was the motor type set Check the setting of Pr 71 Applied motor When using any other manufacturer s motor perform offline auto tuning Please refer to section 6 12 3 7 6 4 Motor rotates in opposite direction Check that the phase seque...

Страница 747: ...point signals check whether the gain Pr 125 and Pr 126 is set correctly Check that the load is not too heavy In agitators etc load may become heavier in winter Check that the torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 setting is not too large to activate the stall function Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P and P1 accidentally 7 6 9 Speed varies during operation When advanced magnet...

Страница 748: ...hanged Parameter setting Check the Pr 79 setting When the Pr 79 Operation mode selection setting is 0 initial value the inverter is placed in the external operation mode at input power on At this time pressing the buttun PU EXT on the operation panel switches the mode to the PU operation mode For other values 1 to 4 6 7 the operation mode is limited accordingly 7 6 11 Operation panel FR DU07 displ...

Страница 749: ...t side When the inverter to motor wiring length is large especially in the 400 V class small capacity models the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line to line leakage current Therefore choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating When measuring and indicating the output voltage and output current of the inverter it is rec ommended to utilize the AM 5 and CA 5 termi...

Страница 750: ...rror will also be produced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT I001301E I001302E Fig 7 8 Differences when measuring power with different instruments 3 wattmeter method Electro dynamometer type 2 wattmeter method Electro dynamometer type Clip AC power meter For balanced 3 phase load Clamp on wattmeter Hall device power arithmetic type 3 wattmeter method Electro dynamometer type 2 ...

Страница 751: ... an over current loss produced in the internal metal parts of the meter will increase and the meter may burn out In this case use an approximate effective value type As the inverter input side current is easily imbalanced measurement of currents in all three phases is recommended Correct values can not be measured in one or two phases On the oth er hand the phase imbalanced ratio of the output sid...

Страница 752: ...ot indicate an exact value 7 7 6 Measurement of converter output voltage across terminals P and N The output voltage of the converter is developed across terminals P N and can be meas ured with a moving coil type meter tester Although the voltage varies according to the power supply voltage approximately 540 V to 600 V is output when no load is connected and voltage decreases when a load is connec...

Страница 753: ...ing a tester 8 1 2 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection Consult us for periodic inspection Check for cooling system fault Clean the air filter etc Tightening check and retightening The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration temperature changes etc Tighten them according to the specified tighten ing torque Refer to page 3 12...

Страница 754: ...k for liquid leakage Contact the manufacturer 2 Check for safety valve projection and bulge Contact the manufacturer 3 Visual check and judge by the life check of the main circuit capacitor Refer to section 8 1 4 Relay contactor Check that the operation is normal and no chatter is heard Contact the manufacturer Control circuit Protective circuit Operation check 1 Check that the output voltages acr...

Страница 755: ...Consult us for periodic inspection Area of Inspection Inspection Item Inspection Item Interval Method Customers s check Daily Periodic Display Indication 1 Check that display is normal Contact the manufacturer 2 Check for stain Clean Meter Check that reading is normal Stop the device and contact the manufacturer Load motor Operqation check Check for vibration and abnormal increase in oper ation no...

Страница 756: ...cuit capacitor main circuit capacitor cooling fan and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level Read the setting of parameter 255 When the life alarm output level is reached the bits are set as follows Parts Judgement Level Main circuit capacitor 85 of the initial capacity Control circuit capacitor Estimated 10 life remaining Inrush current limit circui...

Страница 757: ...at the motor is connected and at a stop Set 1 measuring start in Pr 259 Switch power off The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is off After making sure that the power lamp is off switch on the power supply again Check that 3 measuring completion is set in Pr 259 read Pr 258 and check the deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor ...

Страница 758: ... is two ranks or more smaller as compared to the inverter capacity The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal The start command is given while measuring Operating environment Ambient Temperature annual average 40 C free from corrosive gas flammable gas oil mist dust and dirt Output current 80 of the rated current of ...

Страница 759: ...e modules are without fault b CAUTION Before measurement check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged Fig 8 3 Module device numbers and terminals to be checked I001305E Tester Polarity Measured Value Tester Polarity Measured Value Converter module D1 R L1 P Discontinuity D4 R L1 N Continuity P R L1 Continuity N R L1 Discontinuity D2 S L2 P Discontinuity D5 S L2 N Continuity P S L2 Continuity N...

Страница 760: ...ent years for when the yearly average ambient temperature is 40 C without corrosive gas flammable gas oil mist dust and dirt etc b CAUTION Do not use solvent such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off The display etc of the operation panel FR DU07 and parameter unit FR PU04 FR PU07 are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol Therefore avoid us...

Страница 761: ...aced immedi ately Inverter Type Fan Type Units FR A 740 00083 00126 MMF 06F24ES RP1 BKO CA1638H01 1 00170 to 00380 MMF 08D24ES RP1 BKO CA1639H01 2 00470 00620 MMF 12D24DS RP1 BKO CA1619H01 1 00770 MMF 09D24TS RP1 BKO CA1640H01 2 00930 to 01800 MMF 12D24DS RP1 BKO CA1619H01 2 02160 to 03610 3 04320 04810 9LB1424H5H03 3 05470 to 06830 4 07700 08660 5 09620 to 12120 9LB1424S5H03 6 Tab 8 6 Corresponde...

Страница 762: ...fan connector Remove the fan I001306E Fig 8 4 Removal of the fan cover I001307E Fig 8 5 Removal of the fan NOTE The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity refer to Tab 8 6 00083 00126 00170 to 00620 00770 to 03610 00083 00126 00170 to 00620 00770 to 03610 Fan cover Fan cover Fan cover Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector Fan Fan Fan ...

Страница 763: ...to avoid the cables being caught by the fan Reinstall the fan cover Insert hooks into the holes Insert hooks until you hear a click sound Fig 8 6 Orientation of the fan I001334E NOTE Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter I001308E Fig 8 7 Connection of the fan I001309E Fig 8 8 Reinstall the fan cover Fan side face 00083 00126 00170 to 00380 ...

Страница 764: ... referring to Fig 8 9 When installing the fan use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan I001355aE Fig 8 9 Removal of the fan NOTE The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity refer to Tab 8 6 Fig 8 10 Orientation of the fan I001334E NOTE Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter Front cove...

Страница 765: ...of ripple currents etc The replacement intervals greatly vary with the ambient temperature and operating conditions When the inverter is operated in air conditioned normal environment conditions replace the ca pacitors about every 10 years The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows Case Check the side and bottom faces for expansion Sealing plate Check for remarkable warp and extreme cra...

Страница 766: ...annot be removed Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter s control circuit connector reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws m WARNING Before starting inverter replacement switch power off wait for at least 10 minutes and then check the voltage with a tester and such to ensure sa...

Страница 767: ...own below and do not perform the test on the control circuit Use a 500V DC megger 8 2 2 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test Deterioration may occur I001312E Fig 8 14 Insulation resistance test b CAUTION Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter NO...

Страница 768: ...instruments used and circuits measured When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement measure the following circuits with the instruments given on the next page I001313E Fig 8 15 Examples of measuring points and instruments Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Three phase power supply Inverter Instrument types To the motor Moving iron type Electrodynamomete...

Страница 769: ... Pf1 Calculate after measuring power supply voltage power supply side current and power supply side power Output side voltage U2 Across U V V W and W U Rectifier type AC voltage meter Moving iron type cannot measure Difference between the phases is within 1 of the maximum output voltage Output side current I2 U V and W line currents Moving iron type AC ammeter Difference between the phases is 10 o...

Страница 770: ...gnal Across 2 4 positive and 5 Moving coil type Tester and such may be used Internal resist ance 50kΩ or larger 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA 5 is common Across 1 positive and 5 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC Frequency set ting power supply Across 10 positive and 5 5 2 V DC Across 10E positive and 5 10 V DC Frequency meter signal Across CA positive and 5 About 20mA at maximum frequency Across AM positive and 5 Approximat...

Страница 771: ...310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 Rated motor capacity kW 200 overload capacity 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 Output Output capacity kVA 1 1 1 9 3 4 6 6 9 9 1 13 17 5 23 6 29 32 8 43 4 54 65 Rated current A 120 overload capacity 2 3 1 9 3 8 3 2 5 2 4 4 8 3 7 0 12 6 10 7 17 14 4 25 21 2 31 26 3 38 32 3 47 39 9 62 52 7 77 65 4 93 79 0 116 98 6 150 overload capacity 2 1 1 ...

Страница 772: ...erformance of 100 torque 10 ED and 100 torque 6 ED respectively The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance including those of the input reactor and cables When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug in option the inverter changes to an open type IP00 FR DU07 IP40 except for the PU connector ...

Страница 773: ...apacity 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 Output Output capacity kVA 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 587 660 733 Rated current A 120 over load capacity 180 153 216 184 260 221 325 276 361 306 432 367 481 408 547 464 610 518 683 580 770 654 866 736 962 817 1094 929 1212 1030 150 over load capacity 144 122 180 153 216 184 260 221 325 276 361 306 432 367 481 408 ...

Страница 774: ...Specifications FR A 740 01800 to 12120 Appendix A 4 ...

Страница 775: ...ted Input signals You can select any twelve signals using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection from among multi speed selection remote setting stop on contact second function selection third function selection terminal 4 input selection JOG operation selection selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start external thermal relay input inverter opera tio...

Страница 776: ...lue output voltage frequency setting run ning speed motor torque overload converter output voltage steady or peak value electronic thermal relay function load factor input power output power load meter motor excitation current cumlative energization time actual operation time motor load factor cumulative power energy saving effect cumulative saving power regenerative brake duty PID set point PID m...

Страница 777: ...n drawings FR A700 EC A 7 A 4 Outline dimension drawings A 4 1 FR A 740 00023 to 00126 The FR A740 00023 to 00052 are not provided with a cooling fan i001314E Fig A 1 Dimensions FR A 740 00023 to 00126 2 Ø6 All dimensions in mm ...

Страница 778: ...awings Appendix A 8 A 4 2 FR A 740 00170 to 00380 i001631E Fig A 2 Dimensions FR A 740 00170 to 00380 Inverter H H1 D D1 FR A 740 00170 00250 260 245 170 84 FR A 740 00310 00380 300 285 190 101 5 All dimensions in mm 2 Ø6 ...

Страница 779: ...Appendix Outline dimension drawings FR A700 EC A 9 A 4 3 FR A 740 00470 and 00620 i001632E Fig A 3 Dimensions FR A 740 00470 and 00620 All dimensions in mm 2 Ø10 ...

Страница 780: ...pendix A 10 A 4 4 FR A 740 00770 to 01160 i001317E Fig A 4 Dimensions FR A 740 00770 to 01160 2 Ød All dimensions in mm Inverter W W1 W2 H H1 d D FR A 740 00770 325 270 10 530 10 10 195 FR A 740 00930 01160 435 380 12 525 15 12 250 ...

Страница 781: ...ppendix Outline dimension drawings FR A700 EC A 11 A 4 5 FR A 740 01800 i001318E Fig A 5 Dimensions FR A 740 01800 Inverter W W1 W2 H H1 D FR A 740 01800 435 380 12 525 550 250 2 Ø12 All dimensions in mm ...

Страница 782: ...ne dimension drawings Appendix A 12 A 4 6 FR A 740 02160 and 02600 I001384W Fig A 6 Dimensions of FR A 740 02160 and FR A 740 02600 Inverter H H1 D FR A 740 02160 02600 595 620 300 All dimensions in mm 2 Ø12 ...

Страница 783: ...Appendix Outline dimension drawings FR A700 EC A 13 A 4 7 FR A 740 03250 and 3610 I001633E Fig A 7 Dimensions of FR A 740 03250 and 03610 All di i i 2 Ø12 All dimensions in mm ...

Страница 784: ...dimension drawings Appendix A 14 A 4 8 FR A 740 04320 and 04810 I001634E Fig A 8 Dimensions of FR A 740 04320 and 04810 15 985 10 1010 49 200 200 49 498 12 380 3 2 450 148 5 214 5 185 All dimensions in mm 3 Ø12 ...

Страница 785: ...Appendix Outline dimension drawings FR A700 EC A 15 A 4 9 FR A 740 05470 06100 and 06830 I001635E Fig A 9 Dimensions of FR A 740 05470 FR A 740 006100 and FR A 740 06830 All dimensions in mm 3 Ø12 ...

Страница 786: ...Outline dimension drawings Appendix A 16 A 4 10 FR A 740 07700 and 08660 I001636E Fig A 10 Dimensions of FR A 740 07700 and FR A 740 08660 3 Ø12 All dimensions in mm ...

Страница 787: ...Appendix Outline dimension drawings FR A700 EC A 17 A 4 11 FR A 740 09620 10940 and 12120 I001637E Fig A 11 Dimensions of FR A 740 09620 FR A 740 10940 and FR A 740 12120 4 Ø12 All dimensions in mm ...

Страница 788: ...K i001388E Fig A 12 DC reactor FR HEL H90K 2 terminals for Ø M12 bolt 4 installation holes for M6 screw Earth ground terminal for M6 screw D All dimensions in mm Inverter DC reactor Type W W1 H H1 D Weight kg FR A 740 01800 FR HEL H90K 150 130 340 310 190 20 Rating plate ...

Страница 789: ...Type W W1 H H1 D S S1 Weight kg FR A 740 02160 FR HEL H110K 150 130 340 310 195 M6 M6 22 FR A 740 02600 FR HEL H132K 175 150 405 370 200 M8 M8 26 FR A 740 03250 FR HEL H160K 175 150 405 370 205 M8 M8 28 FR A 740 03610 FR HEL H185K 175 150 405 370 240 M8 M8 29 Rating plate 2 terminals for Ø M12 bolt 4 installation holes for S screw Earth ground terminal for S1 screw D ...

Страница 790: ... kg FR A 740 04320 FR HEL H220K 175 150 405 370 240 M8 M6 M6 M12 30 FR A 740 04810 FR HEL H250K 190 165 440 400 250 M8 M8 M8 M12 35 FR A 740 05470 FR HEL H280K 190 165 440 400 255 M8 M8 M8 M16 38 FR A 740 06100 FR HEL H315K 210 185 495 450 250 M10 M8 M8 M16 42 FR A 740 06830 FR HEL H355K 210 185 495 450 250 M10 M8 M8 M16 46 Rating plate 2 terminals for Ø bolt 4 installation holes for S screw Earth...

Страница 791: ...llation of the product i001391C Fig A 15 DC reactors FR HEL H400K and H450K All dimensions in mm Inverter DC reactor Type Weight kg FR A 740 07700 FR HEL H400K 50 FR A 740 08660 FR HEL H450K 57 Rating plate 2 terminals 4 Ø15 4 installation holes for M10 screw Earth ground terminal for M8 screw 2 M8 eye nut ...

Страница 792: ...eactors FR HEL H500K to H630K All dimensions in mm Inverter DC reactor Type H D D1 Weight kg FR A 740 09620 FR HEL H500K 345 455 405 67 FR A 740 10940 FR HEL H560K 360 460 410 85 FR A 740 12120 FR HEL H630K 360 460 410 95 Rating plate 2 terminals 4 Ø15 4 installation holes for M10 screw Earth ground terminal for M12 screw 2 M12 eye nut H ...

Страница 793: ...ting for the heatsink protrusion attachment Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity I001357E I001358E I001359E I001380E Fig A 17 Panel cutting 6 M10 Screw 6 M10 Screw 04320 04810 05470 to 06830 07700 08660 09620 to 12120 6 M10 Screw 6 M10 Screw ...

Страница 794: ...unit FR PU07 NOTES When installing the FR PU07 on the enclosure etc remove screws for fixing the FR PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR PU07 with M3 nuts Select installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads 5 mm 2 M3 Panel FR ADP Option Cable All dimensions in mm All dimensions in mm 4 Ø4 Panel cutting ...

Страница 795: ...rawings FR A700 EC A 25 A 4 16 Parameter unit FR PU04 Fig 27 Fig A 20 Parameter unit FR PU04 72 15 10 5 16 5 1 25 23 75 11 75 40 3 75 5 x 4mm 5 x M3 17 81 5 46 5 1 5 13 1 5 40 24 48 13 20 80 21 5 18 5 14 5 125 All dimensions in mm ...

Страница 796: ... and write on the right of the parameter number are those used to set the parameter via communication Extended indicates the setting of the extended link parameter Refer to section 6 23 for communication The symbols in the table have the following meanings The parameter is usable in this mode The parameter is not usable in this mode Δ The parameter is available only during position control set by ...

Страница 797: ...92 0 High speed maximum frequency 6 168 19 13 93 0 Base frequency voltage 6 172 Accelera tion decelera tion time 20 14 94 0 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency Δ 6 195 21 15 95 0 Acceleration deceleration time increments Δ Stall prevention 22 16 96 0 Stall prevention operation level 6 155 23 17 97 0 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed Multi speed setting ...

Страница 798: ...tall prevention operation frequency 6 155 50 32 B2 0 Second output frequency detection 6 309 51 33 B3 0 Second electronic thermal O L relay 6 212 Monitor functions 52 34 B4 0 DU PU main display data selection 6 321 54 36 B6 0 CA terminal function selection 6 330 55 37 B7 0 Frequency monitoring reference 6 330 56 38 B8 0 Current monitoring reference 6 330 Automatic restart functions 57 39 B9 0 Rest...

Страница 799: ...4 4A CA 0 Input filter time constant 6 380 75 4B CB 0 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 6 403 76 4C CC 0 Alarm code output selection 6 355 77 4D CD 0 Parameter write selection 6 408 78 4E CE 0 Reverse rotation prevention selection 6 411 79 4F CF 0 Operation mode selection 6 415 Motor constants 80 50 D0 0 Motor capacity 6 150 6 222 81 51 D1 0 Number of motor poles 6 150 6 ...

Страница 800: ...ctions 110 0A 8A 1 Third acceleration deceleration time Δ 6 195 111 0B 8B 1 Third deceleration time Δ 6 195 112 0C 8C 1 Third torque boost 6 147 113 0D 8D 1 Third V f base fre quency 6 172 114 0E 8E 1 Third stall prevention operation current 6 155 115 0F 8F 1 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency 6 155 116 10 90 1 Third output frequency detection 6 309 PU connector communi cation 117 11 91 1 ...

Страница 801: ...selection 6 502 136 24 A4 1 MC switch over interlock time 137 25 A5 1 Start waiting time 138 26 A6 1 Bypass selection at an alarm 139 27 A7 1 Automatic switchover frequency from inver ter to bypass opera tion Backlash measures 140 28 A8 1 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 6 201 141 29 A9 1 Backlash acceleration stopping time 142 2A AA 1 Backlash decelera tion stopping frequency 143 2B AB 1 ...

Страница 802: ...nverter operation 6 502 160 00 80 2 User group read selection 6 412 161 01 81 2 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 6 538 Automatic restart functions 162 02 82 2 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 6 337 163 03 83 2 First cushion time for restart 164 04 84 2 First cushion voltage for restart 165 05 85 2 Stall prevention operation level for restart Current detec...

Страница 803: ...l function selection 6 286 187 1B 9B 2 MRS terminal function selection 6 286 188 1C 9C 2 STOP terminal func tion selection 6 286 189 1D 9D 2 RES terminal function selection 6 286 Output terminal function assign ment 190 1E 9E 2 RUN terminal func tion selection 6 298 191 1F 9F 2 SU terminal function selection 6 298 192 20 A0 2 IPF terminal function selection 6 298 193 21 A1 2 OL terminal function s...

Страница 804: ...heck 255 3F BF 2 Life alarm status display 6 527 256 40 C0 2 Inrush current limit circuit life display 6 527 257 41 C1 2 Control circuit capacitor life display 6 527 258 42 C2 2 Main circuit capacitor life display 6 527 259 43 C3 2 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 6 527 260 44 C4 2 PWM frequency automatic switchover 6 367 Power failure stop 261 45 C5 2 Power failure stop selection 6 346 262 4...

Страница 805: ...M carrier frequency at stop on contact 6 257 Brake sequence function 278 56 D6 2 Brake opening frequency 6 261 279 57 D7 2 Brake opening current 6 261 280 58 D8 2 Brake opening current detection time 6 261 281 59 D9 2 Brake operation time at start 6 261 282 5A DA 2 Brake operation fre quency 6 261 283 5B DB 2 Brake operation time at stop 6 261 284 5C DC 2 Deceleration detec tion function selection...

Страница 806: ...307 07 87 3 Setting for zero analog output 308 08 88 3 Setting for maximum analog output 309 09 89 3 Analog output signal voltage current switchover 310 0A 8A 3 Analog meter voltage output selection 311 0B 8B 3 Setting for zero analog meter voltage output 312 0C 8C 3 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output Parameter for option FR A7AY Digital output 313 0D 8D 3 Y0 terminal function selecti...

Страница 807: ...munication speed 333 21 A1 3 RS 485 communication stop bit length 334 22 A2 3 RS 485 communication parity check selection 335 23 A3 3 RS 485 communication number of retries 336 24 A4 3 RS 485 communication check time interval 337 25 A5 3 RS 485 communication wai ting time setting 338 26 A6 3 Communication operation command source 6 429 339 27 A7 3 Communication speed command source 340 28 A8 3 Com...

Страница 808: ...6 B6 3 Position loop switcho ver position 6 266 355 37 B7 3 DC injection brake start position 6 266 356 38 B8 3 Internal stop position command 6 266 357 39 B9 3 Orientationin position zone 6 266 358 3A BA 3 Servo torque selection 6 266 359 3B BB 3 Encoder rotation direction 6 266 360 3C BC 3 16 bit data selection 6 266 361 3D BD 3 Position shift 6 266 362 3E BE 3 Orientation position loop gain 6 2...

Страница 809: ...ial communication delay time 388 58 D8 3 Send time interval at heart beat 389 59 D9 3 Minimum sending time at heart beat 390 5A DA 3 setting reference frequency 391 5B DB 3 Receive time interval at heart beat 392 5C DC 3 Event driven detection width Orientation control 393 5D DD 3 Orientation selection 6 266 396 60 E0 3 Orientation speed gain P term 6 266 397 61 E1 3 Orientation speed integral tim...

Страница 810: ...signal selection 6 134 430 1E 9E 4 Pulse monitor selection 6 134 Parameter for option FR A7AX Digital inputs 447 2F AF 4 Digital torque command bias 448 30 B0 4 Digital torque command gain Second motor constants 450 32 B2 4 Second applied motor 6 218 451 33 B3 4 Second motor control method selection 6 150 453 35 B5 4 Second motor capacity 6 150 454 36 B6 4 Number of second motor poles 6 150 455 37...

Страница 811: ...s 6 131 470 46 C6 4 upper 4 digits 6 131 471 47 C7 4 Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits 6 131 472 48 C8 4 upper 4 digits 6 131 473 49 C9 4 Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits 6 131 474 4A CA 4 upper 4 digits 6 131 475 4B CB 4 Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits 6 131 476 4C CC 4 upper 4 digits 6 131 477 4D CD 4 Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits 6 131 478 4E CE 4 upper...

Страница 812: ...96 60 E0 4 Remote output data 1 6 315 497 61 E1 4 Remote output data 2 6 315 498 62 E2 4 PLC function flash memory clear 6 486 Parameter for com munica tion options FR A7NC A7NCA A7ND A7NL A7NP 500 00 80 5 Communication error execution waiting time 501 01 81 5 Communication error occurrence count display 502 02 82 5 Stop mode selection at communication error Mainte nance 503 03 83 5 Maintenance ti...

Страница 813: ...AA 5 Communication station number CC Link 543 2B AB 5 Baud rate CC Link 544 2C AC 5 CC Link extended setting USB 547 2F AF 5 USB communication station number 6 487 548 30 B0 5 USB communication check time interval 6 487 Communi cation 549 31 B1 5 Protocol selection 6 445 550 32 B2 5 NET mode operation command source selection 6 429 551 33 B3 5 PU mode operation command source selection 6 429 Curre...

Страница 814: ... compensation amount during deceleration 595 5F DF 6 Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration 596 60 E0 6 Amplitude acceleration time 597 61 E1 6 Amplitude deceleration time 611 0B 8B 6 Acceleration time at a restart 6 337 665 41 C1 6 Regeneration avoi dance frequency gain 6 523 684 54 D4 6 Tuning data unit switchover 6 222 800 00 80 8 Control method selection 6 70 6 150 802 02 82 8 Pre e...

Страница 815: ...imit level during deceleration 6 70 Easy gain tuning 818 12 92 8 Easy gain tuning response level setting 6 88 819 13 93 8 Easy gain tuning selection 6 88 Adjust ment function 820 14 94 8 Speed control P gain 1 6 88 821 15 95 8 Speed control integral time 1 6 88 822 16 96 8 Speed setting filter 1 6 380 823 17 97 8 Speed detection filter 1 6 144 824 18 98 8 Torque control P gain 1 6 124 825 19 99 8 ...

Страница 816: ...ime torque bias terminal 1 gain 6 102 Additional function 849 31 B1 8 Analog input off set adjustment 6 380 850 32 B2 8 Control operation selection 6 241 853 35 B5 8 Speed deviation time 6 107 854 36 B6 8 Excitation ratio 6 146 858 3A BA 8 Terminal 4 function assignment 6 369 859 3B BB 8 Torque current 6 222 860 3C BC 8 Second motor torque current 6 222 862 3E BE 8 Notch filter time constant 6 109...

Страница 817: ...lection 6 523 883 53 D3 8 Regeneration avoidance operation level 6 523 884 54 D4 8 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 6 523 885 55 D5 8 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value 6 523 886 56 D6 8 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 6 523 Free para meter 888 58 D8 8 Free parameter 1 6 536 889 59 D9 8 Free parameter 2 6 536 Energy saving monitor 891 5B DB 8 ...

Страница 818: ...6 905 61 E1 1 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 6 382 C7 905 61 E1 1 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 6 382 Analog output current calibration C8 930 1E 9E 9 Current output bias signal 6 333 C9 930 1E 9E 9 Current output bias current 6 333 C10 931 1F 9F 9 Current output gain signal 6 333 C11 931 1F 9F 9 Current output gain current 6 333 Calibra tion para meters C12 917 11 91 9 Terminal 1...

Страница 819: ...etic flux vector control Vector control Realsensorless vector control Speed Torque Positi on Speed Torque Calibra tion para meters C40 933 21 A1 9 Terminal 4 gain command torque magnetic flux 6 391 C41 933 21 A1 9 Terminal 4 gain torque magnetic flux 6 391 989 59 D9 9 Parameter copy alarm release PU 990 5A DA 9 PU buzzer control 6 538 991 5B DB 9 PU contrast adjustment 6 538 Tab A 5 Parameter list...

Страница 820: ...Parameter list with instruction codes Appendix A 50 ...

Страница 821: ...deceleration 6 201 Load torque 6 175 Cleaning 8 8 Combined operation mode 6 420 Communication Basic settings 6 445 Mitsubishi inverter protocol 6 448 Modbus RTU 6 467 PU connector 6 437 RS 485 terminal 6 440 USB 6 487 Connection external brake resistor 3 45 Motor with encoder 3 34 USB connector 3 33 Contactors and breakers 3 3 Contrast Parameter 6 538 Control codes 6 451 Control modes 6 65 Cooling...

Страница 822: ...sulation resistance test 8 15 J Jog operation Parameter 6 186 L Language selection Parameter 6 537 Leakage currents 3 56 Life Monitor 6 527 Load pattern Selection 6 175 Load torque Selection 6 166 Load torque high speed frequency control 6 509 Logic Sink logic 3 24 Source logic 3 24 M Maintenance 8 1 Maintenance timer Parameter 6 531 Mechanical brake Control 6 261 Mitsubishi inverter protocol 6 44...

Страница 823: ...ctor control 6 65 Regeneration avoidance Parameter 6 523 Regenerative mode Output signal 6 307 Remote outputs Parameter 6 315 Remote setting function Parameter 6 191 Reset 7 23 Resonance points Avoidance 6 170 Restart at alarm occurence 6 351 at power failure 6 339 Reverse rotation prevention Parameter 6 411 S Second functions Setting 6 292 Set value adjust 6 382 analog 6 371 Bias 6 388 Filter 6 3...

Страница 824: ...tor control 6 65 W Wiring Control circuit 3 19 DC reactor 3 55 External brake unit 3 48 High power factor converter 3 51 Magnetic contactor 3 43 Main circuit 3 7 Operation panel 3 30 Power regeneration common converter 3 53 Reactor 3 55 RS 485 terminal block 3 31 Stand alone option units 3 43 System configuration 3 1 Terminal connection diagram 3 5 Wiring cover 3 11 Z Zero current Detection 6 313 ...

Страница 825: ......

Страница 826: ...0880 Ratingen Telefon 02102 486 0 Hotline 01805 000 7650 Fax 02102 486 7170 melfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation de www mitsubishi automation com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для FR-A700 EC

VLT HVAC FC 100

Бренд: Danfoss Страницы: 205

Бренд: Emerson Страницы: 70

Бренд: Emerson Страницы: 220

Бренд: YASKAWA Страницы: 32

Бренд: Knauer Страницы: 31

Бренд: Targus Страницы: 4

Бренд: Pacific Scientific Страницы: 58

Бренд: SEMIKRON Страницы: 37

Бренд: SMC Networks Страницы: 250

Бренд: krispol Страницы: 81

Бренд: AVANT Страницы: 66

300979 - d2 16x DVD±RW FireWire HDD

Бренд: LaCie Страницы: 32

301231 - Firewire Slim DVD±RW Drive

Бренд: LaCie Страницы: 30

Бренд: EACON Страницы: 18

USB2.0CD-RW/DVD-ROM Combo Drive

Бренд: IBM Страницы: 72

Бренд: Danfoss Страницы: 144

VLT Integrated Servo Drive ISD 510 System

Бренд: Danfoss Страницы: 102

Бренд: Parker Страницы: 161

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды